advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 277
Programmer Manual VM700T Video Measurement Set RS-232 Interface 070-9650-02 Programmer Manual VM700T Video Measurement Set RS-232 Interface 070-9650-02 Copyright Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. Table of Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 Related Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the PC and the VM700T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 1–2 Getting Started VM700T Remote Commands VM700T Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1 Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Control and Playback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . appset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . appstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cancelcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cknob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . controlbreak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disptext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . filesin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . getclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . getresults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . restoreconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rgoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rgon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . setclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–4 2–4 2–4 2–5 2–5 2–6 2–6 2–7 2–9 2–9 2–9 2–10 2–10 2–12 2–13 2–13 2–14 2–14 2–15 2–15 2–16 2–17 2–17 2–17 2–18 2–22 2–22 2–23 2–23 2–23 2–24 2–24 2–24 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual i Table of Contents show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . softpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . softrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touchpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touchrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? and ?! Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Button Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major-Mode Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure-Mode Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Key and Function Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Line Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 1S Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25 2–25 2–26 2–26 2–26 2–27 2–27 2–27 2–28 2–28 2–30 2–30 2–30 2–30 2–31 2–32 2–35 Status and Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1 Command Input Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1 3–2 Simple Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 Starting a Terminal Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading/Setting Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting the System Clock Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the System Clock Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending a Terminal Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring Files (SLIP Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Putting the VM 700T into SLIP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3 4–4 4–4 4–7 4–7 4–8 4–8 4–9 4–10 4–10 4–11 4–12 4–12 4–12 4–12 4–12 4–13 4–14 Computer-Based Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17 Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communicating with the VM 700T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal versus Computer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM700T Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of a VM 700T Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18 4–18 4–19 4–19 4–19 4–20 Status and Events Examples ii VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Table of Contents Sample Program: SHELL.BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Program Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function GetPrompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function PutCmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function ReadError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function ReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub VMError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21 4–21 4–21 4–22 4–22 4–22 4–29 4–30 4–30 4–30 4–31 Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control . . . . . . . . . . 4–33 Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation Without Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation With Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consecutive Errors Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modem Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ? and ?! Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A “Generic” Modem Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33 4–33 4–33 4–34 4–35 4–35 4–36 4–36 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39 The Function Keys Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Comments to a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speeding Up or Slowing Down a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Playback from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Playback from Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Playback on Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traversing the Directory Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Functions and Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Functions and Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Function Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39 4–40 4–41 4–42 4–43 4–43 4–44 4–44 4–44 4–45 4–46 4–46 4–46 4–47 4–47 4–48 4–48 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1 “A” Group: Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “B” Group: Audio Limit Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “C” Group: Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “D” Group: Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “E” Group: Component Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “F” Group: Component Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “G” Group: Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “H” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “I” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “J” Group: Teletext Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1 A–4 A–16 A–19 A–22 A–32 A–42 A–47 A–48 A–49 Appendices VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual iii Table of Contents “K” Group: Teletext Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “L” Group: Measurement Locations (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “M” Group: Measurement Locations (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “N” Group: Video Wander Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “O” Group: Video Wander Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “P” Group: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “R” Group: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “S” Group: Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “T” Group: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “U” Group: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “V” Group: Video Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “W” Group: Audio Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “X” Group: Camera Testing (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Y” Group: Camera Testing (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 1S Get/Set Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–55 A–64 A–66 A–68 A–69 A–70 A–73 A–76 A–82 A–86 A–90 A–92 A–93 A–96 A–99 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1 NTSC/PAL Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 1G (Echo/Rounding) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 1S (Serial Digital) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 20 (Teletext) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 21 (Camera Testing) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 22 (Video Wander) Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 30 (Component) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options 40 and 41 (Audio) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–3 B–13 B–13 B–19 B–20 B–25 B–25 B–30 Index iv VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1–1: VM700T rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–1: Function Keys menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–2: VM700T on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–3: Learn Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–4: Function editing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–5: Function Keys directory hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–1: Source Selection Digital configuration file relationship to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–2: Digital Source Files configuration file relationship to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–3: Eye Limits configuration file relationship to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–4: Wander Limits configuration file relationship to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–5: Format Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–6: Format Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A–7: Digital Audio Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 1–2 4–39 4–40 4–41 4–42 4–47 A–99 A–103 A–105 A–108 A–112 A–113 A–118 v Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1–1: Signals used by VM700T RS-232C ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1–2: VM700T 9-pin to PC 9-pin null modem cable . . . . . . . . . Table 1–3: VM700T 9-pin to PC 25-pin null modem cable . . . . . . . . Table 1–4: VM700T 9-pin to modem 9-pin cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1–5: VM700T 9-pin to modem 25-pin cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–1: VM700T commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–2: Applications available in functions and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–3: Front panel button names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–4: Encoding scheme for res command results . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–5: Select Line soft key names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–6: Option 1S soft key names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2–7: Option 1S Format Monitor measurement cell names . . . Table 3–1: Command input errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3–2: Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4–1: Sample program listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–1: “A” keywords: Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–2: “B” keywords: Audio Limit Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–3: “C” keywords: Configuration File (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–4: “D” keywords: Configuration File (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–5: “E” keywords: Component Configuration (NTSC) . . . . Table A–6: “F” keywords: Component Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . Table A–7: “G” keywords: Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–8: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote Configuration . . . . . . Table A–9: “H” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC) . Table A–10: “I” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL) . . Table A–11: “J” keywords: Teletext Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . Table A–12: “K” keywords: Teletext Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . Table A–13: “L” keywords: Measurement Locations (PAL) . . . . . . . Table A–14: “M” keywords: Measurement Locations (NTSC) . . . . . Table A–15: “N” keywords: Video Wander Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . Table A–16: “O” keywords: Video Wander Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . Table A–19: “S” keywords: Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . vi 1–3 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–5 2–1 2–8 2–12 2–20 2–34 2–35 2–35 3–1 3–2 4–22 A–1 A–5 A–16 A–19 A–22 A–32 A–42 A–43 A–47 A–48 A–49 A–55 A–64 A–66 A–68 A–69 A–70 A–73 A–76 A–83 A–86 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Table of Contents Table A–22: “V” keywords: Video Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–23: “W” keywords: Audio Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–24: “X” keywords: Camera Testing (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–25: “Y” keywords: Camera Testing (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–27: “m” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Digital Source Files configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–29: “p” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Wander Limits configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–31: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A–32: “a” keywords: Digital Audio Setup configuration file . Table A–33: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote configuration . . . . . Table A–34: Analog “G” keywords: Remote configuration . . . . . . . . Table B–1: NTSC/PAL measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B–2: Echo/Rounding (Option 1G) measurements . . . . . . . . . . Table B–3: Serial Digital (Option 1S) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B–4: Teletext (Option 20) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B–5: Camera Testing (Option 21) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . Table B–6: Video Wander (Option 22) measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B–7: Component (Option 30) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B–8: Audio (Option 40 and 41) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–90 A–92 A–93 A–96 A–100 A–103 A–105 A–108 A–109 A–114 A–118 A–120 A–120 B–1 B–1 B–2 B–2 B–2 B–2 B–2 B–2 vii Table of Contents viii VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Preface This manual describes the VM700T Video Measurement Set programming capabilities for the RS–232C interface. The manual is organized as follows: Getting Started provides a brief introduction to the remote control features of the VM700T, lists some related software that may prove useful for the remote control task, and tells you how to connect a PC and the VM700T Video Measurement Set to allow them to talk to each other. VM700T Commands first provides a table summarizing the remote control commands. Then each command is discussed in detail giving the syntax form of the command, the descriptive form of the command, and an explanation of what the command does. One or more examples of how the command is used is also provided in this part of the discussion. Status Events lists the error and warning messages produced by function playback and remote operation. Examples tells you how to write programs to control the VM700T without human intervention. A sample program that reads a file of VM700T commands, executes them, and logs both commands and data to a file is included. (A computer, not just a terminal, is required to perform the operations described in this section.) Included in this section is a discussion of using a modem to monitor the operation of the VM700T, and a discussion of how to create and playback functions. Appendix A: GET/SET Keywords, lists and describes the keywords that can be used with the VM700 family get and set commands. Appendix B: Getting Measurement Results, shows the format of the results files produced by each VM700T measurement. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual ix Preface x VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Getting Started Getting Started With its various modes and measurements available in a single instrument, the VM700T Video Measurement Set is a great tool for enhancing measurement productivity. Learning to use the VM700T programming capability can make it even more productive. For instance, by defining a function on the VM700T, you can make it execute repetitive sequences of commands, either from the front panel or under computer control. By connecting the VM700T to a terminal, an IBM PC, or a PC-compatible computer, you can perform any operation available from the front panel, and more. Additional capabilities include logging the commands sent to and the data returned by the VM700T, and branching to different parts of a program based upon earlier results. Related Programs Tektronix sells the following programs for use with the VM700T (all require an IBM PC or compatible computer): VMT: The VMT program facilitates communication between PC-compatible computers and VM700/VM700A/VM700T Video Measurement Sets. It features a menu-driven interface for common operations, as well as extra commands to add decision making and conditional branching capabilities. VMBKUP: This program package actually consists of three programs, VMFTP, VMTERM, and VMBACKIT, that transfer files between the VM700T and an IBM PC or compatible. VMFTP transfers one file at a time, using the familiar FTP protocol. VMTERM is a terminal emulator program that you can use to control the VM700A/VM700T remotely. VMBACKIT transfers several files at a time, and is useful primarily for backing up file sets from the VM700A/VM700T onto a PC. VMREMGR: The VMREMGR program displays VM700A/VM700T graphics on a VGA screen. Note: The VM700T also has a direct VGA output to provide this feature. See your Tektronix representative for information about any of these programs. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 1–1 Getting Started Connecting the PC and the VM700T This section discusses the wiring necessary to connect the VM700T to a computer, terminal, or modem. Successful communication also requires correct settings for Communications Setup file parameters. Setting the Communications Setup file parameters is discussed in Simple Remote Control beginning on page 4–1. The rear panel of the VM700T features three video loop-through inputs, one external sync loop-through, two RS-232C DTE ports (Port 0 and Port 1), a parallel printer port, and a remote-control (contact-closure) connector, labeled “Alarm” (Figure 1–1). The Option 48 instruments also have a GPIB connector. Operation of the GPIB interface for remote control is discussed in the Option 48 GPIB Interface Programmer Manual. Fan exhaust VGA output Parallel printer port Port 0 Alarm Port 1 connector RS-232 ports Figure 1–1: VM700T rear panel RS-232C Connections. The two RS-232C DTE ports of the VM700T (Port 0 and Port 1) are used to output graphics and reports to a printer, as well as for remote operation via a modem or direct serial connection. Both connectors are located on the CPU I/O board and are accessible on the rear panel. Both are 9-pin male “D” connectors. Table 1–1 lists the input and output signals used by the RS-232C ports. 1–2 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Getting Started Table 1–1: Signals used by VM700T RS-232C ports ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Pin Signal Notes 1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) Required for modem connections only. This signal typically comes from a modem and indicates that a phone connection is made. 2 RD (Receive Data) The VM700T receives data on this pin. 3 TD (Transmit Data) The VM700T transmits data on this pin. 4 DTR (Data Terminal Required for modem connections only. This pin is always high Ready) when the VM 700T is turned on. When DTR is asserted, the modem knows it is connected to a “live” PC/terminal. 5 SG (Signal Ground) 7 RTS (Request to Send data to the VM700T) With hardware flow control (CTS/RTS selected), normally RTS connects to the CTS line of a terminal, and the line is active when the VM 700T is ready to receive data. When the receive buffers of the VM 700T are nearing capacity, RTS goes inactive, indicating to the sending device to stop transmitting data. With software flow control set to XON/XOFF or with None selected, RTS is always active. 8 CTS (Clear to Send) With Flow Control (CTS/RTS selected), the VM 700T is enabled to transmit data by a high level on pin 8, and is disabled by a low level. It is normally connected to the RTS line of a terminal. With Flow Control (None or XON/XOFF selected), the VM 700T transmits data regardless of the CTS level. The pin numbers given for the Terminal (DTE) are the most common locations for the corresponding signals. Note that there is considerable deviation from this “common” configuration and that not all devices use control lines in the manner described under this topic. Refer to the instruction manual of the equipment you are connecting to the VM700T to determine exactly how it should be connected. Note also that both ends of the DTE to DTE cable are typically female connectors. The DTE to DCE cable is female on the VM700T (DTE) end, and typically male on the modem (DCE) end. Table 1–2 shows the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin connector of the VM700T to a 9-pin connector on a PC or terminal. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 1–3 Getting Started Table 1–2: VM700T 9-pin to PC 9-pin null modem cable ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VM700T cable end (9-pin female) PC cable end (9-pin female) 3 – Transmit Data (TD) 2 – Receive Data (RD) 2 – Receive Data (RD) 3 – Transmit Data (TD) 5 – Signal Ground (SG) 5 – Signal Ground (SG) 8 – Clear to Send (CTS) 7 – Request to Send (RTS) 7 – Request to Send (RTS) 8 – Clear to Send (CTS) Table 1–3 shows the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin male connector of the VM700T to a 25-pin connector on a PC or terminal. Table 1–3: VM700T 9-pin to PC 25-pin null modem cable ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VM700T cable end (9-pin female) PC cable end (25-pin female) 2 (RD) 2 – Transmit Data (TD) 3 (TD) 3 – Receive Data (RD) 5 (SG) 7 – Signal Ground (SG) 7 (RTS) 5 – Clear to Send (CTS) 8 (CTS) 4 – Request to Send (RTS) Table 1–4 shows the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin connector of the VM700T to a 9-pin connector on a modem. Table 1–4: VM700T 9-pin to modem 9-pin cable ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1–4 VM700T cable end (9-pin female) Modem cable end (9-pin male) 1 (DCD) 1 – Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 2 (RD) 2 – Transmit Data (TD) 3 (TD) 3 – Receive Data (RD) 4 (DTR) 4 – Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 5 (SG) 5 – Signal Ground (SG) 7 (RTS) 7 – Request to Send (RTS) 8 (CTS) 8 – Clear to Send (CTS) VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Getting Started Table 1–5 show the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin connector of the VM700T to a 25-pin connector on a modem. Table 1–5: VM700T 9-pin to modem 25-pin cable ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VM700T cable end (9-pin female) Modem cable end (25-pin male) Shield (ground) 1 – Frame Ground (FG) 3 (TD) 2 – Transmit Data (TD) 2 (RD) 3 – Receive Data (RD) 7 (RTS) 4 – Request to Send (RTS) 8 (CTS) 5 – Clear to Send (CTS) 5 (GND) 7 – Signal Ground (SG) 1 (DCD) 8 – Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 4 (DTR) 20 – Data Terminal Ready (DTR) VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 1–5 Getting Started 1–6 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands VM700T Remote Commands This section describes the VM700T commands for use in functions and remote operation. For each command, the following information is included: the syntax form for the command the descriptive form for the command the scope of the command, (that is, whether the command can be used in function playback, remote operation, or both) the VM700T software version the command runs on an explanation of what the command does one or more examples of how the command is used Command Summary Table 2–1 summarizes the VM700T commands and their uses. Table 2–1: VM700T commands ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Command Scope Purpose appset Function playback Records state information about an application. Not user-editable. appstart Function playback Starts an application’s execution within a function. Not user-editable. cancelcopy Remote operation Clears print spooler. cknob Function playback Turns control knob continuously, a specified number of clicks over a specified amount of time. computer Remote operation Sets VM 700T to be controlled by a computer. control Both Sends characters out control port. controlbreak Both Sends break sequence out control port. delay Function playback Pauses function execution for a user-specified time. disptext Function playback Displays text messages, pauses function execution. execute Both Executes a VM 700T application. exit Remote operation Terminates remote operation, closes PC connection VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–1 VM700T Remote Commands Table 2–1: VM700T commands (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 2–2 Command Scope Purpose filesin Remote operation Returns names of all files in a directory. get Remote operation Returns configuration values specified by keyword. getclock Remote operation Returns date and time from VM 700T system clock. getresults Both Writes a results file for current application. hardkey Both Presses and releases a front-panel button. hardpress Both Presses, but does not release, a front-panel button. hardrelease Both Releases a front-panel button. knob Both Rurns the control knob. loop Function playback Re-starts current function from beginning playback Both Executes a function. print Both Sends formatted file to print spooler. query Remote operation Returns information about a VM 700T keyword. quit Remote operation Terminates remote operation, closes PC connection. remote Remote operation Initiates remote control in non-protocol mode. rename Both Renames file on the VM 700T. res Remote operation Sends ASCII string containing result of current measurement out remote port. resoff Remote operation Turns off previous reson command. reson Remote operation Similar to res, but sends continuous stream of measurement results out remote port. restoreconfig Both Restores configuration values from VM 700T files. return Function playback Returns a function to the calling function. set Both Sets configuration values specified by keyword. setclock Remote operation Sets date and time on VM 700T system clock. show Remote operation Returns contents of specified file. softkey Both Presses and releases a specified soft key. softpress Both Presses, but does not release, a specified soft key. softrelease Both Releases a specified soft key. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Table 2–1: VM700T commands (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Command Scope Purpose spool Both Sends ASCII file to print spooler. stop Function playback Exits from all functions currently executing. terminal Remote operation Sets VM 700T to be controlled from a terminal. touchpress Both Touches VM 700T screen at specified X, Y location. touchrelease Both Releases previous touchpress. ? Function playback Tests keyword, executes command if keyword returns true. ?! Function playback Tests keyword, executes command if keyword returns false. Remote Control and Playback Commands The remote control and function playback commands are presented in this manual as follows: Syntax Form: argument(s) Descriptive Form: argument(s) The syntax form gives the name of the command and the types of arguments it takes, if any. The descriptive form gives the name of the command and the meanings of the arguments it takes. The word “” is the actual command name. Arguments and their meanings are shown in italic. Optional arguments are enclosed with [ ]. Examples are included for most commands with arguments. appset Syntax Form: string number Descriptive Form: variable_name value Scope: function playback The command encodes the state of an application within a function. This helps ensure that the function plays back correctly. commands only appear in functions learned from the front panel. They are not meant to be edited by a user. Editing an command could lead to unpredictable results. appstart Syntax Form: Descriptive Form: VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–3 VM700T Remote Commands Scope: function playback Sending appstart ends a list of appset commands and starts the application. This command is required for correct function playback. Do not delete it. cancelcopy Syntax Form: cancelcopy Descriptive Form: cancelcopy Scope: remote operation Sending cancelcopy clears the print spooler. The command is equivalent to touching the Cancel Copy soft key after pressing the Configure button while the VM700T contains spooled data. cknob Syntax Form: cknob integer integer Descriptive Form: cknob number-of-clicks tenths-of-seconds Scope: function playback See also: knob The cknob command turns the control knob a specified number of clicks over a specified period of time. The effect of a single click depends on the current application and the current screen scaling. A positive number of clicks turns the knob clockwise; a negative number of clicks turns the knob counterclockwise. Time units are specified in tenths of seconds. Example: VMā700T> cknob 50 30 This command turns the control knob clockwise 50 clicks over a period of three seconds. computer Syntax Form: computer Descriptive Form: computer Scope: remote operation See also: remote, terminal The computer command sets the VM700T to be controlled by a computer. This command is used only in no-protocol mode. After this command is executed, characters are not echoed, there is no space after the prompt, and any errors or messages are returned encoded. See Status Events, starting on page 3–1, for information about the encoded error messages returned by the VM700T. See also remote and terminal. 2–4 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands control Syntax Form: control string Descriptive Form: control sequence_of_characters_to_send Scope: function playback, remote operation The control command sends a user-specified string out the control port. This string can be any sequence of ASCII characters, or any of the following: ^x $nn \$ \^ \\ \<LF> a control character, for example, ^G (bell) or ^M (carriage return) a hexadecimal number, where n is 0–9, A–F, or a–f the ‘$” character the ‘^’ character the ‘\’ character a trailing ‘\’ on a line says to ignore end-of-line The control command is usually used to control a device attached to the VM700T, such as a modem. Note that communication through the control command is one-way only. There is no feed-back from the controlled device. This means that if the controlled device is not powered on, or is not even attached, or is sent an incorrect string, the VM700T function or program will continue executing. Note also that the control statement does not add characters to delimit messages. Thus, if the device being controlled requires that messages be delimited with a carriage return, line feed, or carriage-return/line-feed sequence, those characters must be included in the string accompanying the control command. Examples: VMā700T> control ^G This example sends a bell character out the Control Port. VMā700T> control ATDT123Ć4567^M This example sends the ASCII string “ATDT123-4567”, followed by carriage return, out the Control Port. controlbreak Syntax Form: controlbreak number Descriptive Form: controlbreak tenths-of-seconds Scope: function playback, remote operation A controlbreak sends a break character out the control port for the specified number of time units (tenths of seconds). Example: VMā700T> controlbreak 10 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–5 VM700T Remote Commands This command sends a break character out the control port for one second. NOTE. If controlbreak is executed from remote control or function playback immediately after a control command has printed characters to the port, the break character may be actually transmitted for a shorter time than requested. (This happens because of the way the VM700T buffers control and controlĆ break requests.) To ensure that the break character is sent for the full amount of time requested, allow sufficient time for all characters printed with the control command to finish printing before issuing the controlbreak command. delay Syntax Form: delay number Descriptive Form: delay tenths-of-seconds Scope: function playback The delay command pauses function execution for a specified amount of time, given in tenths of seconds. Example: VMā700T> delay 10 This command pauses function execution for a full second. disptext Syntax Form: disptext string[\newline string...] Descriptive Form: disptext string[\newline string...] Scope: function playback The disptext command displays a user-specified message on the VM700T front panel. When the message appears on the VM700T front panel, function execution stops until you touch the display screen. Up to 79 characters can appear on a line. You can create a multi-line message by ending a line with a backslash character (“\”). If the disptext command is contained in a function being played back from remote control, the message appears on the remote terminal if the Remote Control/Message Display item in the Communication Setup file is set to Remote. In this case, function execution stops until you type a carriage return. If the Remote Control/Message Display item in the Communication Setup file is set to VM700 Screen, the message appears on the display screen of the VM700T even when the function is being played back from remote control. Function execution stops until you touch the display screen. 2–6 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Example: disptext Hello, world! When this line is executed in a function, it displays the message “Hello, world!” on the VM700T display. Function execution stops until you touch the screen. disptext \ Roses are red,\ Violets are blue,\ Sugar is sweet,\ And so's a million dollars taxĆfree. When this line is executed in a function, it displays four lines of doggerel on the VM700T display. Function execution resumes when you touch the screen. execute Syntax Form: execute string Descriptive Form: execute application-name Scope: function playback, remote operation Sending the execute command starts a VM700T application. An application is one of the executable files (with exceptions noted below) found in the Instrument Operations, VM700 Diagnostics, or Video Measurements directories in the Executable Files directory. Selecting an operational mode application (Waveform, Vector, Picture, or Auto) is equivalent to pressing one of the mode buttons on the front panel; the LED lights up on the corresponding button. Selecting a measurement or diagnostic application is equivalent to touching a soft key from one of the Measure-mode windows. Example: VMā700T> execute ChromLum~GainDelay This example starts the ChromLum Gaindelay application. When specifying application names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important to match the case (upper or lower) and any special characters used in the application’s name. Table 2–2 lists the applications you can execute under remote control and gives their exact names in functions and remote operation commands. Refer to Naming Conventions on page 2–30 for information about the rules for specifying application names. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–7 VM700T Remote Commands Table 2–2: Applications available in functions and remote controla ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Instrument operations Configure a, b FTP Function b SystemInit Vector Waveform Acquisition~ Diagnostic AdcGain~ Adjustment CalDac~ Adjustment Measure~ Sinewave Measure b Picture AnalogInput~ Diagnostic AudioAnalog~ Diagnostic AudioProcessor~ Diagnostic Controller~ Diagnostic DiagsLoop FilterBoard~ Diagnostic Genlock~ Diagnostic Measure~ Squarewave Measure~ Temperature Bar~LineTime Bounce Burst~Frequency ChromLum~ GainDelay Chrominance~ AMPM Chrominance~ FreqResp (NTSC only) Chrominance~ NonLinearity ColorBar DGDP GroupDelay~ SinX_X H_Blank H_Timing ICPM Jitter Jitter~Long_Time K_Factor Line~Frequency Luminance~ NonLinearity MultiBurst Noise~Spectrum SCH_Phase TwoField VITS~ID (NTSC only) V_Blank Video~Standard Frequency~ Response VM700T diagnostics c Video measurements Echo/rounding (Option 1G) Echo Rounding~Errors Teletext (Option 20) SoundInSync Teletext Camera Testing (Option 21) Colorimetry Defects Detail Fixed_Pattern~ Noise Gamma Geometry~Registration Shading Vertical~Smear Bowtie Component~ Channel_Delay Component~ColorBar Component~ K_Factor Component~ LevelMeter Component~ Multiburst Component~Noise Component~ NonLinearity Component~Vector Lightning Component (Option 30) 2–8 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Table 2–2: Applications available in functions and remote controla (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Audio (Option 40 and Option 41) Audio~Analyzer Audio~Monitor Multitone View_Audio~ Auto_Test Audio~Spectrum Calibrate~ AudioBoard Identify~ Audio_Hardware a Additional applications may be included as further VM 700T options are introduced. Press the Measure key to find out what applications are available for your VM 700T. b The Configure, Function, and Measure files in the Instrument~Operations directory cannot be selected via remote control. c Diagnostic routines can be selected via remote control, but passed test results are not returned. However, errors are logged to the Diagnostic~Errors file which can be read via remote control. exit Syntax Form: exit Descriptive Form: exit Scope: remote operation The exit command terminates the remote session and closes the connection between the VM700T and the computer or terminal. exit takes no arguments. exit is equivalent to quit. filesin Syntax Form: filesin string Descriptive Form: filesin VM700T_directory Scope: remote operation The filesin command returns the names of all files in the specified directory. Example: VMā700T> filesin /nvram0/FunctionKeys/myfiles myfile1 myfile2 myfile3 VMā700T> get Syntax Form: get string [A|B|C] Descriptive Form: get keyword [A|B|C] Scope: remote operation See also: set VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–9 VM700T Remote Commands The get command returns the configuration file value specified by keyword on the channel specified by channel_letter. The keywords available are listed in Appendix B. Example: VMā700T> get VSTA NTSC VMā700T> get DHSM A Meas_Set_1 VMā700T> The first command in the example returns the current video standard for source A. (In this case, it’s NTSC.) The second command in the example returns the name of the current Selected Measurements File for source A when using the NTSC standard. (The file’s name is Meas_Set_1.) getclock Syntax Form: getclock Descriptive Form: getclock Scope: remote operation The getclock command returns the date and time from the VM700T system clock in the form: mon dd hh:mm:ss yyyy where mon is the first three letters of the month, dd is the day of the month, hh is the current hour, mm is the minute, ss is the second, and yyyy is the current year. getclock takes no arguments. Example: VMā700T> getclock Jul 28 14:54:37 1996 getresults Syntax Form: getresults [verbose] [string[ string]] Descriptive Form: getresults [verbose] [keyword[ keyword]] Scope: function playback, remote operation The getresults command stores Measure or Auto mode measurement results in default files in the Measurement~Results directory. In Measure mode, entering getresults with no argument(s) stores the measurement results for the current measurement. If no measurement is currently being executed, the message Request not supported is returned. If a measurement is being executed, the message Results in file: filename is returned. Use the show filename command to view the results. 2–10 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Example: VMā700T> getresults Results in file: ChromLum~GainDelay Entering getresults verbose in Measure mode stores additional information for DGDP, Groupdelay~SinX_X, Luminance~NonLinearity, and Noise~Spectrum measurements. The information is displayed as one or more rows of unlabeled numbers, and is set off from the main file display by a line of plus signs (++++). For DGDP and Luminance~NonLinearity, the additional data are the readouts at each step level in the display. For Groupdelay~SinX_X, 82 additional measurement results are provided, at various frequencies. The first group of results shows the energy in dB, while the second group shows the delay in ns. Initial frequency is 138.5 kHz, with an increment of 69.3 kHz. Frequency and increment are calculated using the following formulas (based on a sub-carrier frequency, Fsc, of 4.43316875 MHz): freq (Groupdelay) = 2 x Fsc /64, increment (Groupdelay) = Fsc /64 For Noise~Spectrum, 198 additional measurements are provided, at various frequencies. The additional data represents noise energy in dB at the frequency. Initial frequency is 34.6 kHz, with frequency increment 34.6 kHz. Frequency and increment are calculated using the following formulas (based on a sub-carrier frequency, Fsc, of 4.43316875 MHz): freq (Noise~Spectrum) = Fsc /128 increment (Noise~Spectrum) = Fsc /128 In Auto mode, entering getresults with no argument(s) executes the current selected measurement list and stores the results in the Measurement~Results Auto file. The message “Results in file: Auto” is returned. You can also use the getresults command in Auto mode with one or more keyword arguments. The keywords, listed in Appendix B, in effect specify a temporary selected measurements list that overrides the active Selected Measurements file. The new selected measurements stay in effect until a restoreconfig command or a set command specifying the Selected Measurements file is issued. Example: VMā700T> execute H_Timing VMā700T> getresults H_Timing VMā700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–11 VM700T Remote Commands This command sequence executes the H_Timing measurement, then stores the results in file /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Results/H_Timing. VMā700T> execute Auto VMā700T> getresults PBAA PBRT PSTB Results in file: Auto This command sequence creates a temporary selected measurements list of three measurements: Luminance Bar Amplitude, Bar Rise Time, and Sync-to-Burst Start. hardkey Syntax Form: hardkey string Descriptive Form: hardkey button_name Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: hardpress, hardrelease Using the hardkey command is equivalent to pressing and releasing a specified front panel button. The hardkey command has the same effect as hardpress followed by hardrelease; however, in general hardkey should be used instead of these commands. Example: VMā700T> hardkey Vector This command has the same effect as pressing the Vector button on the front panel. Front panel button names are listed in Table 2–3. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 2–3: Front panel button names A Display Picture Auto Freeze SelectLine Average Graticule Vector B Help Waveform C Menu XY (Arrow selector) Copy MoveExpand NOTE. The Configure, Function, and Measure buttons cannot be selected in functions or remote operation. 2–12 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands When specifying button names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important to match the name shown in Table 2–3 exactly, including upper or lower case. hardpress Syntax Form: hardpress string Descriptive Form: hardpress button_name Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: hardkey, hardrelease The hardpress command is equivalent to pressing a specified front panel button without releasing it. The button remains pressed (held in) until a hardrelease command is received. The hardpress and hardrelease commands should be used with buttons that need to be held while another action takes place. For all other buttons, use hardkey. Front-panel button names are listed in Table A-3. Note also that if a button toggles (for example, Freeze and Average) you can use hardpress again to turn it off. When specifying button names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important to match the name shown in Table 2–3 exactly, including upper or lower case. Example: VMā700T> hardpress Display VMā700T> knob 50 VMā700T> hardrelease Display This command sequence presses and holds the Display button, increases the display intensity by turning the knob clockwise fifty clicks, then releases the Display button. hardrelease Syntax Form: hardrelease string Descriptive Form: hardrelease button_name Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: hardkey, hardpress A hardrelease command indicates that the specified front panel button has been released. Front-panel button names are listed in Table A-3. When specifying button names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important to match the name shown in Table 2–3 exactly, including upper or lower case. Example: VMā700T> hardrelease Display VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–13 VM700T Remote Commands This example releases the Display button on the front panel. See also the example accompanying the explanation of hardpress. knob Syntax Form: knob integer Descriptive Form: knob number_of_clicks Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: cknob The knob command turns the control knob a specified number of clicks. The effect of a single click depends on the current application and the current screen scaling. A positive number of clicks turns the knob clockwise; a negative number of clicks turns the knob counterclockwise. Example: VMā700T> knob -50 This command turns the knob 50 clicks counterclockwise. loop Syntax Form: loop Descriptive Form: loop Scope: function playback The loop command restarts a function from its first statement. Functions containing a loop statement will only exit if they contain a branch that leads to a return statement, or if the Function button is pressed on the front panel, or if the VM700T is turned off. Example: execute Waveform appstart appstart delay 50 execute Vector appstart appstart delay 50 execute H_Timing appstart appstart delay 50 loop This example function cycles through Waveform, Vector, and H_Timing at five-second intervals. Function execution can be stopped by pressing the Function button on the front panel. 2–14 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands playback Syntax Form: playback string Descriptive Form: playback function_name Scope: function playback, remote operation The playback command calls and executes a function. The default path for the function is /nvramØ/FunctionKeys. If the function is contained in a subdirectory of /nvramØ/FunctionKeys, that subdirectory must be included in the argument of the playback command. Example: VMā700T> playback my_dir/junk This example plays back a function named “junk” in directory “my_dir”, which is a subdirectory of /nvramØ/FunctionKeys. print Syntax Form: print string Descriptive Form: print VM700T_file Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: spool The print command sends a formatted file to the print spooler. The file’s format is specified by the Format item for the Copy port in the Communications Setup file . The default path for the file is the Measurement~Results directory, but other files can be specified with a full pathname or a path relative to the Measurement~Results directory. Compare spool. Example: VMā700T> print ChromLum~Gaindelay This example sends the file ChromLum~Gaindelay from directory Measurement~Results to the print spooler, in the format currently specified by the Format item for the Copy port in the Communications Setup file. VMā700T> print /rom/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/ NTSC/System~Default This example prints the default Measurement Locations file for the NTSC standard, in the format currently specified by the Format item for the Copy port in the Communications Setup file. (Note that the path shown only applies to VM700T units equipped with both Option 01, NTSC, and Option 11, PAL.) VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–15 VM700T Remote Commands query Syntax Form: query string Descriptive Form: query keyword Scope: remote operation A query command returns information about the VM700T keyword used as its argument. In computer mode, information returned includes the type and range of permissible values for each field returned by the get command or used as an argument by the set command. If the field specifies a numeric value, the permissible range of numbers is returned. If the field specifies a file name or choice of other discrete values, the values that can be used as an argument are listed. In terminal mode, the query command also tells you whether or not the keyword is channel-specific (that is, if it requires a channel-letter when used in a get or set command) Examples: (Terminal mode) VMā700T> query VSCA channel independent field 1 is a file name. Possible names are: System~Default VMā700T> query LZCL channel specific field 1 is an integer value with range 1 to 625 VMā700T> query SP0A channel independent field 1 is a string. Possible strings are: none SLIP (Computer mode) VMā700T> query VSCA F1: file list: System~Default VMā700T> query LZCL F1: integer 1 625 VMā700T> query SP0A F1: string list: None SLIP VMā700T> 2–16 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands quit Syntax Form: quit Descriptive Form: quit Scope: remote operation See also: exit The quit command terminates the remote session and closes the connection between the VM700T and the computer or terminal. The quit command takes no arguments; quit is equivalent to exit. remote Syntax Form: remote Descriptive Form: remote Scope: remote operation See also: computer, terminal The remote command initiates remote control in non-protocol mode only. You must enter remote mode before any other remote command is valid. The remote command takes no arguments. rename Syntax Form: rename string string Descriptive Form: rename old_filename new_filename Scope: function playback, remote operation The rename command changes the name of a file in the Measurement~Results directory. This command is particularly useful when you want to get two or more results files from the same measurement and compare them. You can get the results from the first measurement, rename the results file for the first measurement, then get a second results file from the same measurement. You can then either compare the two results files visually or transfer their contents to a computer for automated comparison. Example: VMā700T> rename H_Timing H_Timing_1 This command changes the file named “H_Timing” in the Measurement~Results directory to “H_Timing_1”. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–17 VM700T Remote Commands execute H_Timing delay 50 getresults rename H_Timing H_Timing_old delay 18000 getresults This sequence of function commands starts the H_Timing application, delays five seconds, then records measurement results from the application. It then changes the name of the measurement results file from “H_Timing” to “H_Timing_old”. It then waits one half-hour, and records measurement results from the application again. The two measurement results files, “H_Timing” and “H_Timing_old”, can then be compared for differences. res Syntax Form: res [-v] [number[ number...]] Descriptive Form: res [-v] [position-of-result[ position-of-result...]] Scope: remote operation See also: resoff, reson The res command returns an encoded or human-readable ASCII string containing the result of the measurement executing on the VM700T. The res command can be used whenever a measurement that returns a result is executing on the VM700T. (Most measure-mode measurements return results.) The -v option tells res to produce the verbose (human-readable) form of the output. The default is the encoded form of the output, intended to be read by computers. The optional number arguments specify the ordinal numbers of measurement results desired. For example, if a measurement produces seven results and you only want results 1, 2, and 5, you would issue the command res 1 2 5. Deciphering res Results: the –v Option. Results returned by res are deciphered differently, depending on whether or not the -v option is present in the command line. Consider the following command sequence: execute H_Timing getresults show H_Timing 2–18 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands This sequence of commands transfers the H_Timing measurement results file out the VM700T remote port, in the following form: Measurement Results Channel B Tue Jul 30 11:16:12 H Timing Line = 17 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Rise Time 255.8 n sec Sync Fall Time 260.0 n sec Sync Width 4.69 u sec Sync Level 301.2 mV Burst Level 306.0 mV Sync to Burst Start 5.52 u sec Burst Width 2.19 u sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- The equivalent result, generated by the following command sequence using the –v option: execute H_Timing res -v looks like this: 18 1:255841 2:260041 3:46944 4:301249 5:306049 6:55244 7:21944 This result is interpreted as follows: The first number (18) uniquely identifies the measurement application that generated the result. The H_Timing measurement’s identification number is 18. The second and succeeding numbers have the form XX:YYYYYY. The digit(s) to the left of the colon signify the data item number. In the H_Timing measurement, 1 is the sync rise time value, 2 is the sync fall time value, etc. The digits to the right of the colon indicate the measurement result, encoded as follows: If D is the number of digits in the measurement result, the leftmost D-2 digits specify the mantissa of the measurement result, normalized to a number between 0 and 10 (preceded by a minus sign if the mantissa is negative). For example, if the measurement result is 301149, the mantissa of the number is 3.011. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–19 VM700T Remote Commands The rightmost two digits specify the power of ten by which the mantissa is multiplied, plus fifty. Thus, if the multiplier is 10–6 (“micro”), the rightmost two digits in the data item are 44. If the multiplier is 103 (“kilo”), the rightmost two digits in the data item are 53. If N is the total number of measurement results returned, the total number of data items sent is always equal to 2N +1: one for the measurement’s identifying number, followed by an ordinal number and the data value for each measurement result. An asterisk character (‘*’) returned as data indicates that a measurement result is unavailable. This happens, for instance, when the VM700T is unable to find or recognize a signal feature necessary for a particular measurement. Deciphering res Results: No –v Option. When used without the option, returns an encoded string containing the same information as the string returned by the option, but in compressed form. Each byte of the human-readable message maps to a nibble (that is a half-byte or four bits) in the encoded message, as shown in Table 2–4. Table 2–4: Encoding scheme for res command results ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ASCII character Hexadecimal encoding ‘0’–’9’ 0–9 Space A – B * C End-of-Buffer D Note that the colon character does not appear in the table. This is because colon characters are only output as visual delimiters for the human-readable form of the measurement result. In the encoded form, only space characters are output as delimiters. If an odd number of nibbles encode a measurement set, the nibble following the end-of-buffer nibble is filled with another end-of-buffer nibble. Notes About Interpreting res Results. The command only reports results that are in the application’s current “measurement loop.” This means that may not return all results that may be contained in a measurement results file on each pass. Results that are returned, however, are uniquely identified so that a computer program (or a human reader) can always correctly identify them. 2–20 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Example: VMā700T>execute V_Blank VMā700T>hardkey Menu VMā700T>softkey Equalizer_Pulse VMā700T>hardkey Freeze VMā700T>getresults V_Blank VMā700T>show V_Blank Measurement Results Channel A 12:39:59 Fri Aug 09 V Timing Measurement Average Off ------------------------------------------------------------Equalizer Pulse 2.29 u sec Equalizer Pulse 10% 2.42 u sec Serration Pulse 4.75 u sec Serration Pulse 10% 4.62 u sec ------------------------------------------------------------VMā700T>res -v 28 1:22944 2:24244 VMā700T>softkey Serration_Pulse VMā700T>hardkey Freeze VMā700T>hardkey Freeze VMā700T>getresults V_Blank VMā700T>show V_Blank Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 09 12:41:26 V Timing Measurement Average Off ------------------------------------------------------------Equalizer Pulse 2.29 u sec Equalizer Pulse 10% 2.42 u sec Serration Pulse 4.75 u sec Serration Pulse 10% 4.62 u sec ------------------------------------------------------------VMā700T>res -v @28 3:47544 4:46244 The example shown above runs the V_Blank application and brings up the Equalizer Pulse display. The getresults command returns four distinct data values: two for equalizer pulse data, and two for serration pulse data. The res command, however, returns only the two equalizer pulse values (labeled “1:” and “2:”, respectively). VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–21 VM700T Remote Commands Bringing up the Serration Pulse display and invoking getresults returns four distinct data values. Executing res at this time, however, returns only the two serration pulse values (labeled “3.” and “4:”, respectively). resoff Syntax Form: resoff Descriptive Form: resoff Scope: remote operation See also: res, reson The resoff command tells the VM700T to stop sending measurement results out its remote port. It is used to “turn off” a previous reson command. reson Syntax Form: reson Descriptive Form: reson Scope: remote operation See also: res, resoff The reson command works similarly to res, except that reson sends a continuous stream of measurement results out the remote port of the VM700T, instead of a single result. The stream of results is sent asynchronously, so that the VM700T can still recognize and respond to incoming commands (such as resoff). reson can be used with or without the -v option, to produce encoded or human-readable ASCII results. Reading the VM700T reson Output Stream. When reson is issued, the VM700T begins sending results data out the remote port. At this point, there are, in effect, two separate data streams coming from the VM700T. The first is the normal data stream for remote control, consisting of prompts, echoed commands, viewed file output, and other output generated by remote control requests. For example: VMā700T> execute ColorBar VMā700T> getresults Results are available in file `ColorBar'. VMā700T> In this example output, the prompts and the Results message were generated by the VM700T in response to a specific input request. By contrast, the results data produced while the VM700T is executing reson are sent asynchronously, without any specific request after the original reson command. For example: VMā700T> reson VM7{results data}00A> {results data}{results data}... 2–22 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Notice that in this example some of the results data arrived in the middle of the VM700T prompt string, making the VM700T output appear garbled. In order to separate the two data streams, you must know how they were combined. When the two data streams are encoded, all characters in the normal output data stream are printable ASCII characters in the range 0 to 127, inclusive. By contrast, the initial character for the measurement results data stream is a nonprintable character, with a decimal value of at least 127. To be specific, the initial character of a data packet produced by reson has decimal value 182 (hex value B6); the initial character of a data packet produced by reson -v has decimal value 183 (hex value B7). Thus, a computer program reading the output data stream from the VM700T need only compare each received character with the value 127. Any character greater than 127 introduces a measurement results data packet, and a handler function should be called to process the incoming data. The handler function should return when the end-of-buffer nibble (hex value 13) is encountered. restoreconfig Syntax Form: restoreconfig Descriptive Form: restoreconfig Scope: function playback, remote operation Sending a restoreconfig command restores configuration values from the Configure files. Exiting a function or exiting remote operation does not automatically restore these values; restoreconfig must be issued to do so. Note that the system line and other global variables are not restored with restoreconfig. return Syntax Form: return Descriptive Form: return Scope: function playback See also: stop Sending return exits the currently executing function and returns to its calling function. Compare stop. rgoff Syntax Form: rgoff Descriptive Form: rgoff Scope: remote operation See also: rgon VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–23 VM700T Remote Commands Sending rgoff takes the VM700T out of remote graphics mode. This command is only of interest to someone writing remote applications for the VM700T. rgon Syntax Form: rgon Descriptive Form: rgon Scope: remote operation See also: rgoff Sending rgon puts the VM700T into remote graphics mode. This command is only of interest to someone writing remote applications for the VM700T. set Syntax Form: set string [A|B|C] number|string [number|string...] Descriptive Form: set keyword [A|B|C] value [ value...] Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: get The set command defines the configuration values to be used during the remote session. The keywords available to use with set are listed in Appendix B. Configuration values changed with set remain in effect until they are changed by another set command, restoreconfig is executed, or the instrument is powered off. Note that the system line and other global variables can be changed with set but are not restored with restoreconfig. Example: VMā700T> set GLN5 100 VMā700T> set GLN6 18 VMā700T> set SPCF PostScript This command sequence sets the system line for NTSC to 100, the system line for PAL to 18, and the serial port copy format to PostScript. setclock Syntax Form: setclock string Descriptive Form: setclock date_and_time_string Scope: remote operation See also: getclock The setclock command sets the date and time on the system clock, using the following format: mon dd hh:mm:ss yyyy 2–24 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands where mon is the first three letters of the month, dd is the day of the month, hh is the current hour, mm is the minute, ss is the second, and yyyy is the current year. Hours are specified in 24-hour format (00 for midnight, 23 for 11 p.m.). Example: VMā700T> setclock Aug 11 17:07:22 1996 show Syntax Form: show string Descriptive Form: show filename Scope: remote operation The show command returns the contents of a specified file. The default path for the file is the Measurement~Results directory, but other files can be specified by supplying a full pathname or a path relative to the Measurement~Results directory. Example: VMā700T> show /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video~Source The default file for video sources Channel A Video Source: xmiter Channel B Video Source: switcher Channel C Video Source: System~Default This example returns the contents of file Video~Source in directory /nvramØ/ ConfigFiles. softkey Syntax Form: softkey string Descriptive Form: softkey softkey_name Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: softpress, softrelease The softkey command (soft key used as one word) is equivalent to pressing and releasing a specified soft key. The softkey command has the same effect as softpress followed by softrelease; however, in general softkey should be used instead of these commands. When specifying soft key names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important to match the case (upper or lower) and any special characters used in the name of the soft key. See Naming Conventions on page 2–30 for information about the rules for specifying soft key names. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–25 VM700T Remote Commands Example: VMā700T> softkey ITS_Search This example is equivalent to pressing and releasing a soft key labeled ITS Search on the touch screen. softpress Syntax Form: softpress string Descriptive Form: softpress softkey_name Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: softkey, softrelease Using softpress is equivalent to pressing a specified soft key without releasing it. The soft key remains pressed (held in) until a softrelease or touchrelease command is received. The softpress and softrelease commands should be used with soft keys that need to be held while another action takes place. For all other soft keys, use the softkey command. Note also that if a soft key function toggles, you can use softpress again to turn it off. When specifying soft key names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important to match the case (upper or lower) and any special characters used in the soft key name. See Naming Conventions on page 2–30 for information about the rules for specifying soft key names. Example: VMā700T> softpress Rescale This command is equivalent to pressing a soft key labeled Rescale without releasing it. softrelease Syntax Form: softrelease Descriptive Form: softrelease Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: softkey, softpress Receiving a softrelease command indicates that a soft key has been released. spool 2–26 Syntax Form: spool string Descriptive Form: spool filename Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: print VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands The spool command sends an unformatted, ASCII-text file to the print spooler. The default path for the file is the Measurement~Results directory, but other files can be specified with a full pathname or a path relative to the Measurement~Results directory. Compare print. Example: VMā700T> spool ChromLum~GainDelay This examples sends the file ChromLum~Gaindelay from directory Measurement~Results to the print spooler, in ASCII-text format. VMā700T> spool /rom/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/NTSC/System~Default This example prints the default Measurement Locations file for the NTSC standard, in ASCII-text format. (Note that the path shown only applies to VM700T units equipped with both Option 01, NTSC, and Option 11, PAL.) stop Syntax Form: stop Descriptive Form: stop Scope: function playback See also: return Sending stop exits all functions in the current call sequence. terminal Syntax Form: terminal Descriptive Form: terminal Scope: remote operation See also: computer, remote Sending terminal sets the VM700T to be controlled from a terminal. The terminal command is used only in no-protocol mode. When terminal is specified, characters are echoed, there is a space following the prompt, and any errors or messages are returned as text. Compare computer. touchpress Syntax Form: touchpress number number Descriptive Form: touchpress x_coordinate y_coordinate Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: touchrelease VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–27 VM700T Remote Commands Sending touchpress indicates that a specified x,y location on the touchscreen is being “touched.” The 0,0 location is the upper left corner of the screen. The X range is 0 to 639; the Y range is 0 to 479. If the X,Y location is within a soft key icon, the soft key action is executed. Example: VMā700T> touchpress 200 330 This example “touches” the screen location 200 units to the right and 330 units down from the upper left corner of the screen. touchrelease Syntax Form: touchrelease Descriptive Form: touchrelease Scope: function playback, remote operation See also: softpress, touchpress The touchrelease command indicates a soft key or touchscreen location has been released. ? and ?! Constructs The ? construct is followed by any configuration keyword and a single command. During function playback, if the keyword has non-zero value, the rest of the line following the ? construct is executed. Otherwise,function execution continues with the next statement in the function. The ?! construct is similar, except that the rest of the line is executed if the keyword has a value of zero. Otherwise,function execution continues with the next statement in the function. The ? and ?! constructs are available only during function playback. They are typically used to test the value of a Carrier Detect line in order to control communications with a modem, or to test the global out-of-limits (GOOL) flag to see if an application found one or more measurements that were out-of-limits. Using ? and ?! With the Carrier Detect Flag 2–28 Syntax Form: ?GCD0 string | ?GCD1 string | ?!GCD0 string | ?!GCD1 string Descriptive Form: ?GCD0 command | ?GCD1 command ?!GCD0 command | ?!GCD1 command Scope: function playback VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands ?GCDO tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on Port 0. ?GCD1 tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on Port 1. If the value returned is 1 (true), then command is executed. Otherwise, function execution continues with the next statement in the function. ?!GCDO and ?!GCD1 function similarly, except that command is executed if the value returned is 0 (false). ?GCDO, ?GCD1, ?!GCD0, and ?!GCD1 are primarily used to control communication with a modem connected to the VM700T. Example: ?GCD0 return delay 5 loop This first line of this example tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on serial port 0. If the test returns true, the function returns to its caller. If it returns false, the function waits one half-second, then loops back to the first command. Using ? and ?! with the Global Out-of-Limits Flag Syntax Form: ?GOOL string | ?!GOOL string Descriptive Form: ?GOOL command | ?!GOOL command Scope: function playback The ?GOOL query returns the status of the global out-of-limits flag. If the most recently executed application fould one or more measurements that were out-of-limits, this flag is set to TRUE. If the global out-of-limits flag returns 1 (true) when ?GOOL is executed, then command is executed. Otherwise, function execution continues with the next statement in the function. The ?!GOOL query functions similarly, except that command is executed if the value returned is 0 (false). The GOOL flag must be reset to 0 explicitly within a function. It is a good programming practice to do this just before executing a measurement application. Example: set GOOL 0 execute K_Factor getresults ?GOOL print K_Factor VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–29 VM700T Remote Commands The first line of this sample function sets the global out-of-limits flag to 0. The second and third lines execute a measurement application (in this case, K_Factor) and write a results file from it. The last line tests to see if the global out-of-limits flag was asserted, i.e., if any measurement returned an out-of-limits value since the last time the out-of-limits flag was de-asserted. If ?GOOL returns true, then the command “print K_Factor” is executed to print out the results file. Naming Conventions This section tells where to find the legal button names, and discusses the rules for forming application, softkey, and function names for use in function and remote operation commands. Button Names Major-Mode Applications Table 2–3, accompanying the description of the hardkey command on page 2–12, lists the legal button names. Major-mode applications are reachable with single-button presses in front-panel operation. These applications are Waveform, Vector, Picture, and Auto. Major-mode applications can be executed in functions or remote operation using the execute or hardkey commands, followed by the button or application name. Example: VMā700T> VMā700T> VMā700T> VMā700T> VMā700T> VMā700T> VMā700T> VMā700T> execute hardkey execute hardkey execute hardkey execute hardkey Waveform Waveform Vector Vector Picture Picture auto auto All of these example commands cause the major-mode applications named in them to execute. Measure-Mode Applications Measure-mode applications are the applications available when you press the Measure front-panel button. These include measure-mode video measurements and diagnostics. They may also include optional video measurements and audio measurements, if your VM700T is equipped with options. To form the application name for a measure-mode application, use the name exactly as displayed in the directory window. If the name is split over two lines, substitute a tilde character (‘~’) for the carriage return between the two parts of the name. 2–30 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Examples: The H_Timing measurement, whose soft key looks like this in the video-measurements directory window: H_Timing would be executed like this: VMā700T> execute H_Timing The ChromLum Gaindelay measurement, whose soft key looks like this in the video-measurements directory window: ChromLum GainDelay would be executed like this with a remote command: VMā700T> execute ChromLum~GainDelay It is important to match upper and lower case and any special characters that appear in the application name exactly. Soft Key and Function Names The general rule for forming a soft key name is to take the spelling and capitalization from the text displayed, omit any variable part, and join all words with an underscore character (‘_’). Examples: The default set of soft keys that appears on the screen when you press the Menu button while the VM700T is in Waveform mode looks like this: 1H Display Cursors Sync Noise Extra Functions Filter Select Clamp Couple A function that executes Waveform and presses each of these soft keys in turn is as follows: execute Waveform hardkey Menu softkey H_Display delay 20 softkey Cursors delay 20 hardkey Menu delay 10 softkey Sync delay 20 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–31 VM700T Remote Commands hardkey Menu delay 10 softkey Noise_dB delay 10 softkey Noise_dB delay 10 softkey Extra_Functions delay 20 hardkey Menu delay 10 softkey Filter_Select delay 20 hardkey Menu delay 10 softkey Clamp_Couple delay 20 hardkey Menu delay 10 hardkey Menu The delay commands are inserted between the various softkey and hardkey commands so that you can see the effects of each command when the function is replayed. Note that a hardkey Menu command follows the commands to touch the Cursors, Sync, Extra_Functions, Filter_Select, and Clamp_Couple soft keys. This is because each of these soft keys displays a submenu when touched. hardkey Menu returns you to the top-level menu of an application from any submenu. Note also that the Noise_dB soft key is touched twice in succession. This is because this soft key toggles on and off. The first command highlights the soft key. At this point you can change the value displayed in the soft key by means of a knob command. The second command turns the soft key highlight off. Select Line Soft Keys The exceptions to the soft key naming rule are the soft keys that select a system line after you press the Select Line button. For most Measure-mode applications, the names for these soft keys are PresetN, where N varies from 1 to the number of line soft keys available. For the Waveform, Vector, ICPM, Bowtie, and Lightning applications, however, the names for these soft keys are PresetNstd, where N again varies from 1 to the number of soft keys available, and std can be either NTSC or PAL. 2–32 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Examples: The default soft keys that appear when you press the Select Line button in the Bar LineTime application while using the NTSC standard are: Field Toggle Field 1 Line 17 Field 1 Line 18 Field 2 Line 17 Field 2 Line 18 Default Line The names of these soft keys, from left to right, are: Field_Toggle, Preset1, Preset2, Preset3, Preset4, Default_Line. The default soft keys that appear when you press the Select Line button in the Waveform application while using the NTSC standard are: Field Toggle Field 1 Line 17 Field 1 Line 18 Field 1 Line 19 Field 1 Line 20 Field 1 or 2 Field 3 or 4 The names of these soft keys, from left to right, are: Field_Toggle, Preset1NTSC, Preset2NTSC, Preset3NTSC, Preset4NTSC, Field_1_or_2, and Field_3_or_4. The default soft keys that appear when you press the Select Line button in the Waveform application while using the PAL standard are: Field Toggle Line 17 Line 18 Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4 The names of these soft keys, from left to right, are: Field_Toggle, Preset1PAL, Preset2PAL, Frame_1, Frame_2, Frame_3, and Frame_4. Table 2–5 tells whether each video application uses the PresetN form or the PresetNstd form of line selection soft key names. It also lists the video applications that do not use presets in their line selection soft keys, as well as those that do not use the Select Line button. Audio applications don’t use the Select Line button. For video applications not listed here (that is, applications that may come in future option packages for the VM700T), the easiest way to ascertain which form of the Select Line soft key name to use is to create a function that uses those soft keys. You can then examine the function for commands that correspond to the soft keys you wish to use. The commands will show the correct names for the soft keys. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–33 VM700T Remote Commands Table 2–5: Select Line soft key names ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 2–34 Preset form Soft Key names Uses PresetN Bar~LineTime ChromLum~GainDelay Chrominance~FreqResp Chrominance~NonLinearity ColorBar DGDP Echo GroupDelay~SinX_X H_Timing K_Factor Luminance~NonLinearity MultiBurst Noise~Spectrum Rounding~Errors ShortTime~Distortion SoundInSync Teletext TwoField Uses PresetNstd Bowtie ICPM Lightning Vector Waveform Doesn’t Use Presets Chrominance~AMPM Doesn’t Use Select Line Bounce Burst~Frequency H_Blank Jitter Jitter~LongTime Line~Frequency Picture SCH_Phase VITS~ID V_Blank Video~Standard VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual VM700T Remote Commands Option 1S Soft Keys The Option 1S soft keys that are exceptions to the soft key naming rule are listed in Table 2–6. The measurement cells for the SDI Format Monitor application that are exceptions to the naming rule are listed in Table 2–7. Table 2–6: Option 1S soft key names ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Soft key names Remote soft key names 75% with 100% Flag 75% 100% Cursors / Units Field 1 Line 22a Field 2 Line 22a Rise\Fall Times Rise\Fall Overshoot 75_with_100_Flag 75 100 Cursors_Units Field_Line_1a Field_Line_2a Rise_Fall_Times Rise_Fall_Overshoot a These names represent the two SDI Select Line mode preset soft keys. Table 2–7: Option 1S Format Monitor measurement cell names ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Measurement cell names Remote measurement cell names Ancillary Audio Sequence Ancillary Audio BrokenBlk Ancillary Audio Smpls/Frm Ancillary Audio 5/5Pattrn Luminance Error Low Luminance Warning Low Luminance Warning High Luminance Error High Chrominance Error Low Chrominance Warning Low Chrominance Warning High Chrominance Error High Miscellaneous XY(Z) Miscellaneous Empty Spc Anc_Audio_Sequence Anc_Audio_BrokenBlk Anc_Audio_Smpls/Frm Anc_Audio_5/5Pattrn Luma_Error_Low Luma_Warning_Low Luma_Warning_High Luma_Error_High Chroma_Error_Low Chroma_Warning_Low Chroma_Warning_High Chroma_Error_High Misc_XY(Z) Misc_Empty_Spc VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 2–35 VM700T Remote Commands 2–36 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Status and Events Status and Events This section lists the error and feedback messages returned by the VM700T, and their meanings. Command Input Error Messages Table 3–1: Command input errors Computer mode Terminal mode Computer mode Terminal mode ?001 Bad command argument ?017 Remote not enabled ?002 Sub-function not found ?101 Request filtered ?003 Playback nesting too deep ?102 Screen event not key ?004 Function directory inaccessible ?103 Unknown softkey ?005 Function not found ?104 Invalid softkey ?006 Unknown command ?105 Unwanted hardkey ?007 Unknown hardkey ?106 Unknown input ?008 Out of memory ?107 Not found ?009 Recursive function call ?108 Request not supported ?010 Bad command in this context ?109 No server resources ?011 Name too long ?110 Illegal name ?012 No filename ?111 Not writable ?013 Line too long ?112 Not readable ?014 Command only meaningful for non-IP connections ?113 No permission ?015 Bad time format (use getclock) ?114 Bad argument(s) ?016 Function playback in progress. Enter ^C to stop it. ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 3–1 Status and Events Feedback Messages Table 3–2: Messages Computer mode Terminal mode Computer mode Terminal mode a Function playback in progress. Enter ^C to stop it. !006 Hit CR to continue. a Function playback continues... !007 Remote terminated. a Function playback terminated. !008 Remote has been terminated locally. a Function playback completed. @name b Results in file name b !005 c !010 application-specific message ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ a This message has no computer mode equivalent. b Name is the file where measurement results are stored after a getresults command. c This message indicates that a function is displaying text on the screen or else an error has occurred in function playback. This message has no terminal mode equivalent. NOTE. In computer mode, a @ is returned after successful command completion; a ! precedes a message; and a ? precedes an error. 3–2 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Examples Simple Remote Control This section describes how to control the VM700T remotely, using a terminal emulator program such as Kermit or Telnet. It assumes that you already have a terminal emulator program on your PC, and that you know how to use it. The section concerns itself with the specific operations required to control the VM700T in a terminal session, where the user types commands into the PC or terminal one at a time. Computer-Based Remote Control, starting on page 4–17, tells how to write programs that control the VM700T without requiring human intervention or supervision. Remote operation on the VM700T is performed via the serial (RS-232-C) ports on the rear panel. The Getting Started section entitled “Connecting the PC and the VM700T,” discusses the VM700T RS-232-C port requirements in detail and s typical cable wiring configurations. The VM700T has two modes for remote control: “no-protocol” mode and “SLIP” mode. The VM700T is in “no-protocol” mode when the Protocol setting for the Remote Control port in the Communication Setup file has a value of “None”. The VM700T is in “SLIP” mode when the “Protocol” setting for the Remote Control port in the Communication Setup file has a value of “SLIP”. In no-protocol mode, the VM700T and the PC/terminal communicate without any special communications protocol. There is simply a cable connection between the VM700T and the PC/terminal, over which commands and data are exchanged. When the VM700T is in no-protocol mode, you can use any commonly available communications program, such as Kermit, ProComm, or Qmodem. No-protocol mode has two important limitations: In no-protocol mode, there is no control to ensure that information is not corrupted in transit between the VM700T and the PC/terminal. No-protocol mode cannot be used to write files onto the non-volatile memory in the VM700T. This limitation ensures that corrupted information will not be written into the critical operating files and settings of VM700T file system. Protocol, or SLIP, mode establishes an error-free connection between the VM700T and the PC, through the use of data checking and re-transmission techniques. When the VM700T is in SLIP mode, it lets you write files into its non-volatile memory, by means of programs such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol, for which implementations exist on many platforms, including PC’s). Communicating with the VM700T when it is in SLIP mode requires that you have a program running on the PC that implements SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). Several SLIP implementations are commercially available. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–1 Simple Remote Control The one in use by the VM700T developers at Tektronix is called “PC/TCP,” and is produced by FTP Software, Inc.1 Other packages available for PC’s and compatibles include KA9Q/NET,2 BW?TEL,3 CMU PC/IP,4 MIT PC/IP,5 FUSION,6 Internet-PC,7 PC-NFS, 8 and WIN/PC.9 If you only need to send commands and receive data from the VM700T and do not need to send files into it, you should consider using Tektronix’ VMT program. This program is made to communicate with the VM700T. It incorporates more knowledge of the VM700T than a general-purpose terminal emulator can, and makes the task of remote control of the VM700T considerably easier. To order the VMT program, contact your Tektronix sales representative. Tektronix also makes available a set of programs called VMBKUP, consisting of the VMFTP program (for one-file-at-a-time transfers) and VMBACKIT (for multiple-file transfers). These programs are highly recommended if your major purpose in transferring files is simply to back up data residing on the VM700T. See your Tektronix sales representative for more details about the VMBKUP software package. The rest of this section tells you how to perform common VM700T operations using either a no-protocol terminal emulator (for example, Kermit) or a SLIP-protocol one (for example, Telnet). Whether the VM700T is in no-protocol mode or SLIP mode, the steps you use to perform most actions during a terminal session are the same. The operations described in this section include the following: 4–2 how to start a terminal session how to read or set configuration parameter values how to measurements how to get measurement results how to end a terminal session how to transfer files (SLIP mode only) 1 Contact: FTP Software, Inc., 26 Princess St., Wakefield, MA 01880. 2 Contact: Phil Karn, KA9Q, 25-B Hillcrest Rd., Warren, NJ 07060. 3 Contact: Beame & Whiteside Software Ltd., 259 Fiddler’s Green Road, Ancaster, Ontario, Canada L9G 1W9. 4 Contact: Drew D. Perkins, Carnegie Mellon University, 4910 Forbes Ave., Pittsburgh, PA 15213 5 Contact: M.I.T. Microcomputer Center, Room 11-209, 77 Massachusetts Ave., Cambridge, MA 02139. 6 Contact: Network Research Corporation, 2380 N. Rose Avenue, Oxnard, CA 93030. 7 Contact: Sirius Systems, Inc., Box 2202, Petersburg, VA 23804. 8 Contact: Sun Microsystems, Inc., 2550 Garcia Ave., Mountain View, CA 94043. 9 Contact: The Wollongong Group, 1129 San Antonio Road, Palo Alto, CA 94303. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control Starting a Terminal Session Before you start a terminal session with the VM700T, you should check several things: 1. Verify that a serial port on the PC and a serial port on the VM700T are connected via an RS-232-C cable. 2. Verify that the correct drivers are loaded on the PC, if you intend to use SLIP mode. (Check your CONFIG.SYS file; if you are using PC/TCP, for instance, it should contain two lines that load the SLIP.SYS and IPCUST.SYS drivers, respectively.) 3. Check the settings contained in the Communication Setup file in the /nvram0/ConfigFiles directory. To do so, do the following: a. Display the Communications Setup file on the VM700T screen (press the Configure button, touch the Configure Files soft key, touch the icon for the Communications Setup file). Check the following settings: b. Remote Control Port should be set to the port that the RS-232-C cable is connected to. c. Message Display should be set to Remote if you want messages from VM700T functions to be displayed on the PC/terminal, or to VM700 Screen if you want messages to be displayed on the VM700T screen. d. If you are using no-protocol mode, Non-SLIP Interfacing mode should be set to Terminal. e. Scroll to the communications parameters (Protocol, Baud Rate, Flow Control, Character Size, Parity, Reset Character, Carrier Detect) for the remote control port (0 or 1). f. If you are using no-protocol mode, set Protocol to None, otherwise set it to SLIP. g. Set the baud rate as desired. h. Set flow control to CTS/RTS for hardware flow control, XON/XOFF for software flow control, whichever your communications program supports. Note that in SLIP mode, Flow Control becomes CTS/RTS regardless of the setting displayed. i. Set Character Size to an appropriate value. (A value of 8 almost always works.) Note that in SLIP mode, Character Size becomes 8 regardless of the setting displayed. j. Set the Reset Character to “none” on the Remote port. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–3 Simple Remote Control k. Set Carrier Detect to “disabled”. (This parameter is not currently used, but is reserved for future use.) 4. Start your communications program, and configure it to send commands out the communications port connected to the VM700T. 5. Type the command remote. At this point, further presses of the carriage return key should return the VM700T prompt on a new line. You are now communicating with the VM700T via remote connection. Executing Measurements The execute command starts applications on the VM700T. It takes a single parameter, the name of the application being invoked. When an application name takes two lines to display on the screen, the parameter name is formed using a “~” (tilde) between the two lines. See the description of the execute command in VM700T Remote Commands on page 2–7 for a complete list of VM700T applications. NOTE. New applications may be included as new version of the VM700T are introduced. Press the Measure key to find out what applications are available for your VM700T. Examples: VMā700T> execute Vector starts Vector Mode on the VM700T. VMā700T> execute Chrominance~NonLinearity starts the Chrominance~NonLinearity measurement on the VM700T. Getting Measurement Results To make a measurement and retrieve the results remotely, do the following: 1. Start the measurement, using the execute command (“execute applicationname”). 2. Send the getresults command. 3. Send the command show application-name. 4–4 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control The execute command starts the application. The getresults command takes a “snapshot” of the application’s measurements and stores them in a file in the Measurement Results directory. When the results are written in the file, the VM700T sends a message out the control port, consisting of the filename in which the results were stored. This is always the same as the application name. Each invocation of getresults writes a new set of measurement values into the Measurement Results directory. This new set overwrites the previous contents of the Measurement Results file for the current application name. For example, if the H_Timing measurement is running, issuing the getresults command writes the current measurement results into a file called H_Timing in the Measurement Results directory. Issuing getresults again writes a new set of results into a file with the same name (H_Timing) in the same directory (Measurement Results). The results produced by the first getresults command are lost. You can save results from successive getresults commands by using the rename command, or by using logging or file-saving features available with your telecommunications program. When a measure-mode application is running, getresults takes a single, optional argument. That argument is the keyword verbose, which for certain measurements provides a complete list of measured points. The measurements that accept the verbose argument are DGDP, Luminance~NonLinearity, Noise~Spectrum, and GroupDelay~SinX_X . Measure-mode video measurements also write out their results (just as if a getresults command was issued) when exiting (for example,when another measurement or mode is started). Note, however, that while the getresults command always ensures that completed measurement results are written, simply exiting a measurement may not. In Auto mode, getresults can take a list of arguments, each consisting of the four-letter keyword of an Auto-mode measurement. If getresults is issued without any arguments, the results of measurements specified by the current selected measurements file are written to the results file. When a list of measurements is specified as arguments to getresults, Auto mode continues to make only the measurements specified in the list until another getresults command is sent with a new list, or until the current selected measurements file is reset, or until a restoreconfig command is sent. Thus, if you want results from multiple passes of the same measurements list, only the first getresults command need supply the measurement list. Subsequent getresults commands without arguments will return results from the same list. show sends the contents of a specified file out the control port. The show command takes a single argument, consisting of the name of the file to be sent. If no pathname is supplied in the show command’s argument, the file is assumed to be a results file, residing in the Measurement Results directory. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–5 Simple Remote Control Most often, the show command is used along with getresults to retrieve or view measurement results just written. However, any file can be viewed with the show command, by specifying either a relative path from the Measure~Results directory, or an absolute system path. Examples: VMā700T> execute K_Factor VMā700T> getresults Results in file: K_Factor VMā700T> show K_Factor Measurement Results Channel A Thu Sep 28 14:28:42 2T Pulse K Factor Waveform->Pulse & Bar Line = 17 Graticule CCIRĆ2T Average Off -----------------------------------------------------------K-2T 0.6 % KF K-PB -0.2 % KF PB Ratio 99.0 % HAD 201.0 n sec -----------------------------------------------------------VMā700T> This example executes the K_Factor measurement, stores the results in a file called K_Factor in the Measurement Results directory, and displays the results on the PC/terminal screen. VMā700T> execute Auto VMā700T> getresults PBAM PTTK PSYA Results in file: Auto VMā700T> This example puts the VM700T into Auto mode, measures the PAL Bar Amplitude Error, 2T Pulse K-Factor, and Sync Amplitude Error for the current channel, then writes the results into a file named Auto in the Measurement Results directory. VMā700T> show /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Auto_Limit~Files/PAL/Studio This example displays a file called Studio from the directory of PAL Auto_Limit Files. 4–6 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control Printing Files The print command sends VM700T files to the Copy port (which is usually attached to a printer). The file is printed in two steps. First, the file is copied into the print spooler directory. Then, the print spooler sends it out to the Copy port. The VM700T prompts for a new command as soon as the file is submitted to the spooler; the file need not have actually printed out yet. The print command formats files in accordance with the Copy Format entry in the Communications Setup file. “Formatting” a file means generating page headers, page ejects, and special printer commands, depending on the printer type. The spool command is similar to print, except that it does not format the file. spool is used when the page formatting implemented by the print command is not wanted. The spool command differs from show in that spool is available from remote operation or from function playback, while show is only available from remote operation. In addition, spool and print spool the output file to the Copy port, while show simply outputs the file to the Remote Control port. Function Playback Function playback can be started from remote control with the playback command. The playback command takes a single argument, and that is the name of the function to play back. If the function is in a subdirectory, the subdirectory name must be included in the argument. Example: VMā700T> playback Special~Measurements/TransDGDP This example plays back a function called TransDGDP, stored in a directory called Special~Measurements in the /nvram0/FunctionKeys directory. When a function is being played back remotely, it stops before finishing if issued a Ctrl-C, or upon exit from remote control. If remote control is terminated locally (by pressing the Configure button) while remote function playback is in progress, the function playback stops also. Informational messages are displayed when functions are played back remotely. The location of the message display is controlled by the Remote Control/Message Display entry in the Communications Setup file. If this entry is set to “VM700T Screen”, messages appear on the VM700T screen, and you have to touch the screen to continue function playback. If this entry is set to “Remote”, messages appear on the PC or terminal screen, and you have to type Return to continue function playback. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–7 Simple Remote Control Note that when certain commands that normally provide a response (especially getresults ) are issued from function playback, the response is not seen on the PC or terminal screen. This is true even if the function playback command was issued during remote operation. In such cases, it is important to know EXACTLY what the function is doing, and to store results away periodically for later retrieval. Example: Consider the following function, which makes the same Differential Gain video measurement five times, saving the results for retrieval later: execute DGDP hardkey Menu softkey ITS_Search # let it find the right line hardkey Menu # make 5 passes for retrieval later getresults rename DGDP DGDP1 delay 36000 #delay one hour getresults rename DGDP DGDP2 delay 36000 #delay one hour getresults rename DGDP DGDP3 delay 36000 #delay one hour getresults rename DGDP DGDP4 delay 36000 #delay one hour getresults rename DGDP DGDP5 Playing back this function from remote operation would produce no output on the screen. If the individual commands were issued directly, each getresults command would return the string “Results in file: DGDP.” By using the rename command, however, it is easy to store away results in the Measurement Results directory for later retrieval with the show command. Reading/Setting Configuration Parameters Configuration Files 4–8 The VM700T reads several files when it is powered up. The Source_Selection Video file specifies a file from the Video_Source Files directory, one for each channel. VM700T units equipped with both Option 01 and Option 11 specify a file from the Video_Source Files directory for each channel and for each standard (NTSC and PAL). VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control Files from the Video_Source Files directory tell the VM700T what files to read in other directories to get configuration information. These files and their corresponding directories include the following: Auto Limits File: tells what file to read from the Auto_Limit Files directory to get the caution and alarm limits on Auto-mode measurements. Measure Limits File: tells what file to read from the Measure_Limit Files directory to get the alarm limits on Measure-mode measurements. Measurement Locations File: tells what file to read from the Measurement Locations directory to get the line/position locations of Measure-mode measurements. Selected Measurements File: tells what file to read from the Selected_Measurements directory to get the list of selected Auto-mode measurements. Option directory files (such as, Component, Teletext, and so on): tells what file to read from the directory given by the option name to get the configuration parameters for that option. All these files are stored in the nonvolatile memory of the VM700T. At start-up time, the files are read into random-access memory, where they are referenced as needed when the instrument makes measurements or performs other operations. Configuration Keywords Each configuration parameter has a unique keyword, consisting of four characters (capital letters or digits). Some keywords also require that a channel specification be included. For example, to find out the PAL Bar Amplitude Error limits for channel A in Auto mode, you would use the keyword and channel specification PBAM A. Some keywords do not reflect a value from the configuration files, but instead record a specific part of the instrument state. Examples include the following keywords: GSRC, which specifies the current video source (channel A, B, or C, or some combination thereof), GSSR, which specifies whether or not the signal is locked to source, and GLN6, which sets or returns the global line number when using the PAL standard. The corresponding keyword for NTSC is GLN5. You can find out the current setting of any configuration parameter with the get command. You can set most configuration parameters with the command. Note that these commands modify only the configuration values kept in the memory of the instrument; the files stored in non-volatile memory are not touched. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–9 Simple Remote Control Therefore, after power to the instrument is cycled, or after the restoreconfig command is executed, or after a function key is aborted, the actual configuration of the instrument again reflects the values in the files. Some configuration parameters, especially those relating to communications, such as baud rate, character size, and so on, cannot be set remotely. Parameters that can only be read but not set are listed as “read-only” parameters in Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords. Getting Configuration Parameters You find out the current value of any VM700T configuration parameter by using the get command and the parameter of the keyword. The syntax of the get command is as follows: get keyword [channel] Not all keywords require a channel specification. See Appendix B for a complete list of VM700T keywords, their syntaxes, and their meanings. Example: VMā700T> get PBAM A -5.00 5.00 -10.00 10.00 VMā700T> The command get PBAM A returns the lower caution, upper caution, lower alarm, and upper alarm limits in effect for the PAL Bar Amplitude Error Auto measurement on channel A. Setting Configuration Parameters You can specify the value of any settable VM700T configuration parameter by using the set command, followed by the parameter’s keyword, a channel specification (if applicable), and the correct number of data values for that parameter. The syntax of the set command is as follows: set keyword [channel] value [value[ value...]] Not all keywords require a channel specification. Refer to Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords for a complete list of VM700T keywords, their syntax, and their meaning. Some of the numeric values associated with a keyword might be undefined (represented in the configuration files by a –-––– field). To set a value to undefined, use the string “undef” (see examples, below). When a keyword has several values associated with it (for example, the set of four floating point numbers associated with Auto measurements limits), you can keep a value unchanged by using the string “same” (see examples, below). Reading in a new configuration file is like re-setting every one of the parameters named in that file. For example, if you set new values for a PAL Auto 4–10 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control measurement limit, and then reset the Auto Limits File name for that channel (keyword: CHAF), you effectively over-write the parameter values you just set. This leads to an important rule: read in configuration files first, then set individual parameters. Examples: VMā700T> set PBAM A -6. 6. -12. 12. changes the caution and alarm values used for the PAL Bar Amplitude Error Auto measurement on channel A, and VMā700T> set SPCF PostScript changes the current copy format to PostScript. VMā700T> set PSNP A 42.0 undef 42.0 undef sets the lower caution limit and the lower alarm limit for the Signal-to-Noise Periodic measurement to 42.0 db, and sets the upper limits to “undefined.” VMā700T> set PBAE A same same same 12.0 sets the upper alarm limit for Burst Amplitude Error in Auto mode on Channel A to 12 percent, and leaves the others unchanged. Restoring Configuration Parameters The restoreconfig command re-reads all configuration values from the configuration files. Note that when you record a function, the VM700T puts many set commands at the start of the function file, and puts a restoreconfig command at the end. These commands make it possible to reproduce the exact state in which a VM700T function was recorded when the function is played back. Upon function completion, the restoreconfig command returns the VM700T to its power-up state. (Be warned, however, that any user-specified parameter settings not stored in a file when the restoreconfig command is executed are lost.) Most of the keywords set at the beginning of a function are not associated with the configuration files, but with the current global state of the instrument: values like GLN5/GLN6 (global line number), GACP (clamp position in microseconds for channel A), and GCCC (clamp coupling value for channel C). These keywords are not included in any configuration file, thus there is no concept of restoring these values. There are three configuration values recorded at the beginning of a function that are normally specified from configuration files. These are the names of the video source files for each channel (VNCA, VNCB, and VNCC for NTSC; VSCA, VSCB, and VSCC for PAL). The trailing restoreconfig command undoes the effect of these final three set commands when the function is finished playing back. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–11 Simple Remote Control If the restoreconfig command is deleted from the function, the state of the VM700T remains as it was when the function key was finished being recorded, which might be different than what is currently in the NVRAM files. Getting the System Clock Time The getclock command returns the VM700T’s system date and time. The getclock command does not take any parameters. Example: VMā700T> getclock Sep 20 11:03:04 1989 Setting the System Clock Time The setclock command sets the VM700T system date and time feature. The setclock command takes a single parameter in the same format the instrument returns it as a result of a getclock command. Example: VMā700T> setclock Aug 20 20:04:00 1996 Ending a Terminal Session To end a terminal session, type quit or exit to break the remote connection with the VM700T. Then, exit your telecommunications program. Transferring Files (SLIP Mode Only) The VM700T must be in SLIP mode to allow you to transfer files into it. This section tells you how to put the VM700T into SLIP mode, and how to use the telnet and ftp programs to transfer files to the VM700T. If your major purpose in transferring files is simply to back up data residing on the VM700T, or to restore files originally backed up from the VM700T, you may wish to consider a set of programs that Tektronix makes available called VMBKUP. VMBKUP consists of the VMFTP program used for one-file-at-atime transfers, and VMBACKIT used for backing up multiple files. See your Tektronix sales representative for more details about the VMBKUP software package. Putting the VM700T into SLIP Mode Use the following steps to put the VM700T into SLIP mode from the front panel: 1. Press the Configure button. 2. Touch the Configure Files soft key. 4–12 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control 3. Turn the knob until the icon for the Communication Setup file appears in the directory window. 4. Touch the icon for the Communication Setup file. 5. Turn the knob until you can read the Port entry for the Remote Control parameter group. It will read None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. If it is already set to the serial port that the PC is connected to, skip to step 10. Otherwise, continue with the next step. 6. Turn the knob until the “Port” line in the Remote Control parameter group is highlighted. 7. Touch the line on the screen. A box appears around the highlighted line. 8. Turn the knob until the desired value appears. 9. Touch the line on the screen again, or touch the “Accept Input” soft key. 10. Turn the knob until you can read the Protocol entry in the “Port” parameter group for the Remote Control port. If it is already set to SLIP, you’re done. Touch the “Update & Exit” soft key to exit the editing session. Otherwise, continue with the next step. 11. Turn the knob until the “Protocol” line in the “Port” parameter group for the Remote Control port is highlighted. 12. Touch the line on the screen. A box appears around the highlighted line. 13. Turn the knob until the value “SLIP” appears. 14. Touch the line on the screen again, or touch the “Accept Input” soft key. 15. Touch the Update & Exit soft key to exit the editing session. Starting ftp FTP (File Transfer Protocol) transfers files from one computer to another, using the TCP/IP protocol. FTP connections take place between a server and a client. The server listens on a TCP/IP logical port for connection requests. The client issues a connection request to a waiting server, and a connection is made during which files can be transferred. File transfers are managed between FTP participants through commands from the client and responses from the server. There are commands available to send and receive files, to change the server’s working directory, to get directory listings, to create new directories, and to remove directories and files. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–13 Simple Remote Control The VM700T implements the FTP protocol in such a way that it can act as an FTP server, while a computer connected to it can act as an FTP client. In order to use FTP to access the file system of the VM700T, you must have an FTP client program running on the computer connected to the VM700T. In addition, the FTP program must be running on the VM700T. You can use FTP on any serial port configured for SLIP protocol. To start the ftp program on the VM700T from the front panel do the following steps: 1. Press the Measure button. 2. Go to the /nvram0/Executable~Files/Instrument~Operations directory. 3. Touch the FTP soft key. The VM700T is ready to be connected to a remote host. To start the ftp program on the VM700T from remote control do the following steps: 1. Start telnet on your PC, and connect to the VM700T. You can use the ipaddress of the VM700T directly (for example, telnet 254.254.254.2, as configured in the /nvram∅/IpConfig file), or you can use a pseudonym from a hosts table entry (for example, telnet VMā700T). 2. Type the command execute FTP. 3. Type the command quit. 4. Start ftp on your PC, using either the ip address of the VM700T (for example, ftp 254.254.254.2, as configured in the /nvram∅/IpConfig file) or a pseudonym from a hosts table entry (such as, ftp VMā700T). If password checking is enabled on the VM700T, you must issue the PASS command with the correct password before file access is granted. Using ftp Once you have established an ftp connection between the VM700T and your PC, you can transfer files between the PC and the VM700T, find out or set the current VM700T directory, list the files in the current VM700T directory, and quit from the ftp session (among other operations). See your ftp program documentation for a complete list of program capabilities. The put command transfers files from the PC to the VM700T. Example: The following command transfers a file named “test.fnc” from the PC to the current directory in the VM700T: 4–14 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Simple Remote Control ftp:VMā700T> put test.fnc foreign file (default test.tnc):Transferred 91 bytes in 1 seconds (728 bits/sec, 91 bytes/sec) 250 File transfer complete ftp:VMā700T> Certain VM700T files are not writable via FTP –– these generally being those which control communication parameters of the VM700T. When you try to write a configuration file, the file is compared against an internal template to ensure that it will be readable when needed by the VM700T. If this check fails, an error is returned, and the file is not written. To ensure the proper file format, it is a good idea to first read a valid matching configuration file from the VM700T, modify it locally, then write it back. NOTE. Configuration files, when successfully written, will not take effect in the VM700T until the restoreconfig command is issued from a remote connection or function playback, or until you cycle power on the VM700T. The get command transfers files from the VM700T to the PC. Example: The following command transfers a file named “Func1” from the VM700T’s current directory to the PC. ftp:VMā700T> get Func1 local file (default Func1): func1.txt Transferred 91 bytes in 0 seconds 250 File transfer complete ftp:VMā700T> The pwd command returns the current VM700T directory. Example: ftp:VMā700T> pwd 257 Current directory is /nvram0/FunctionKeys". ftp:VMā700T> The cd command sets the current VM700T directory. Example: ftp:VMā700T> cd /nvram0/ConfigFiles 250 Change of directory successful. ftp:VMā700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–15 Simple Remote Control The ls command lists the files in the current VM700T directory. Example: ftp:VMā700T> ls Timed~Functions Func1 Transferred 24 bytes in 1 seconds (192 bits/sec, 24 bytes/sec) 250 File listing complete. ftp:VMā700T> The dir command is similar to ls, but also returns the size (in bytes) of each directory entry. Entries with a size of 0 are most likely (but are not necessarily) directories. Example: ftp:VMā700T> dir 0 Timed~Functions 85 Func1 Transferred 42 bytes in 0 seconds 250 File listing complete. ftp:VMā700T> Both quit and exit terminate the ftp connection. Example: ftp:VMā700T> quit C:\> 4–16 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control This section describes how to write programs to control the VM700T remotely, without operator intervention. There are several reasons you may wish to write a program to control the VM700T instead of controlling it from a terminal or using its front panel. These are the following: a greater degree of automatic operation. Repetitive operations are more efficient and less prone to error when executed from a program than manually. faster execution. A set of operations written into a program will generally execute faster than the same operations performed manually. ability to branch. You may wish to make some measurement, then perform different action depending on the results of the measurement. Since the VM700T command language contains only limited branching constructs, any alternative courses of action you may wish to take can’t be written into a VM700T function. They must be written into a program. A “shell” program that you can use as a template for your own programs appears later in this chapter. Before presenting it, however, this chapter discusses several other matters you must consider when writing programs to control the VM700T. Those things discussed are the following: the programming language you are going to use whether or not you need a communications library for the language you choose how the VM700T communicates with a computer program, including how the VM700T signals the following conditions: acceptance of a command error conditions completion of a transmission and readiness to accept another command VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–17 Computer-Based Remote Control Programming Languages Before you start to write programs to control the VM700T, you have to decide what language to write the program in. You can write programs to control the VM700T in any programming language you like. However, you will probably want to use a language for which libraries of routines are available to handle data communications. BASIC, C, and Pascal are good choices. The sample program presented in this chapter is written in Microsoft QuickBASIC. (C and Pascal users should have no problem understanding the BASIC code; the reverse is probably not true, which is why the program appears in BASIC.) Communications Libraries You will probably want to purchase a commercial library of communications routines to use with your program if any of the following applies: your program uses SLIP mode to transfer files between the PC and the VM700T you are writing in any language other than BASIC and using only no-protocol data transfers you are using CTS/RTS flow control Communications packages currently available for BASIC, C, and Pascal (and the companies that produce them) include the following: BASIC: QuickComm (Software Interphase) C: C Asynch Manager (Blaise Computing), Comm Library (Greenleaf Software), C Communications Toolkit (Magna Carta), Silverware C Asynch Library (SilverWare), Essential Communications (South Mountain Software) Pascal: Pascal Asynch Manager (Blaise Computing) In addition, the section entitled Simple Remote Control beginning on page 4–1 lists sources for commercially available SLIP implementations. 4–18 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control Communicating with the VM700T Before you can write programs to control the VM700T, you must know how the VM700T communicates with a computer and understand the following: Terminal versus Computer Mode terminal versus computer mode (such as local versus remote echo) VM700T responses that indicate: acceptance of a command; error conditions; completion of a transmission exceptions to the previous item: the command. When remotely controlled, the VM700T operates in either terminal mode or computer mode. Terminal mode is intended for use when the VM700T is being controlled interactively from an actual terminal (with no processing capabilities). In terminal mode the VM700T acts as follows: echoes characters it receives adds a space after sending its prompt sends error messages as alphabetic text Computer mode is intended for use when the VM700T is being controlled by a computer program, without human intervention. In computer mode, the VM700T acts as follows: does not echo characters it receives sends only its prompt when execution of a command is completed (no additional space) sends error messages as numerical encodings, not alphabetic text When you write a computer program to control the VM700T, the VM700T is best used in computer mode. VM700T Responses In computer mode, the VM700T responds to commands in one of two ways. The VM700T sends an ‘@’ character if the command was successful. The VM700T sends a ‘?’ character or ‘!’ character followed by a three-digit error encoding if the command was not successful. After sending the ‘@’ character, the VM700T sends any data transmission initiated by the command (for example, filename). When this data transmission is complete, the VM700T sends the remote prompt to indicate readiness to accept another command. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–19 Computer-Based Remote Control The exception to this rule is the command. After it receives a command, the VM700T sends no ‘@’. Once function playback begins, the next character the computer program receives from the VM700T will be either a ‘?’ or ‘!’ character (if an error occurs during function playback, or if the VM700T sends an informational message) or the characters that make up the remote prompt. After sending the ‘?’ or ‘!’ character and a three-digit error identifier, the VM700T sends the remote prompt, unless the error is returned because remote operation has been terminated. Structure of a VM700T Program Once you know the rules that the VM700T uses to respond to commands, you can determine what the structure of a generic VM700T remote control program should be. Such a program can be divided into three parts: initialize variables, then establish communication and remote operation execute and respond to commands clean up The first part of the program sets up any variables that will be required, opens any files that will be required, opens a communications channel to the VM700T, then (in no-protocol mode) sends the command “remote”. If this operation is successful, the LED in the front panel Configure button starts blinking. This indicates that the VM700T is now in remote mode and is being controlled by the computer program. (You can terminate remote operation from the front panel by pressing the Configure button. If remote operation is terminated in this way in no-protocol mode, it can be restarted by sending the command “remote”.) The main loop of the program sends a command to the VM700T, reads the response from the VM700T, performs an appropriate action depending on the response received (such as branching to another part of the program, displaying an error message, logging data into a file, and so on), reads the VM700T prompt, then loops back to send another command. This loop may also need to handle flow control (such as, telling the VM700T to stop sending characters until the ones already sent can be processed, and restarting the flow of characters from the VM700T once they are processed). The main loop of the program should execute until the setting of some variable indicates that program execution is complete. The final part of the program performs final cleanup functions (writing out and closing files, closing communications channels, restoring the initial configuration of the VM700T, and so on). 4–20 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control Sample Program: SHELL.BAS The following pages list and explain a sample program called SHELL.BAS to control the VM700T. You can use this sample program as a starting point from which to write your own VM700T programs. Before running the program, make sure that the VM700T is properly set up for communicating with the PC: the proper cable is connected to the proper port on both the PC and the VM700T, the remote port is set correctly in the Communication~Setup file, the baud rate is set correctly, and all the other communication parameters are right. When running SHELL.BAS, make sure that Flow Control for the remote port in the VM700T is set to XON/XOFF. A listing of the SHELL.BAS program follows, along with comments about what each section of the program does. Program Overview SHELL.BAS is written in Microsoft QuickBASIC. SHELL.BAS accepts as input a user-specified text file containing VM700T commands, written one command to a line. The program reads and executes each command sequentially. SHELL.BAS logs all commands and data in another user-specified file, in addition to displaying them on the PC screen. SHELL.BAS demonstrates many items of interest in writing programs for the VM700T, including the following operations: Preliminaries how to acquire the VM700T prompt the first time, so that it can be monitored to indicate the completion of a transmission from the VM700T how to handle VM700T responses to commands how to handle XON/XOFF flow control how to decode VM700T error codes Lines 1 through 35 perform some preliminary tasks before the main part of the program starts. Lines 5 through 10 declare several functions and subroutines that will be used later. Lines 12 through 18 set up some global variables that will be needed later. Lines 19 through 35 get the names of the input and output files from the keyboard, open the files, then start the output file by writing the date, the time and the names of the input and output files. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–21 Computer-Based Remote Control Establishing Communication Lines 37 through 42 establish communication with the VM700T. Line 38 sets up output port COM1 on the PC to communicate at 9600 baud, no parity, eight data bits, one stop bit, send a line feed with each RETURN, and initialize the DSR (Data Set Ready) line to 0. Line 39 sends the command remote out port COM1. Line 40 calls the GetPrompt function, which waits for the response from the VM700T and records the VM700T prompt for later use in recognizing end-oftransmission. Line 41 displays the prompt character sequence on the screen. Line 42 writes the prompt character sequence to the output file. Main Program Loop Lines 44 through 94 form the main program loop. Lines 46 through 79 form a large WHILE loop that executes as long as there are lines to be read from the input file and no fatal error has been encountered. Line 47 reads a line from the input file. If the line read is not blank, line 49 prints it on the screen, line 50 writes it to the output file, and line 51 sends it to the VM700T by calling PutCmd. Lines 52 through 67 handle the case where PutCmd! returns a non-zero value, such as an error or warning message happened during execution of the last command. Program Listing Table 4–1: Sample program listing ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Line 5 10 15 4–22 ' sample program for controlling VMā700T ' reads text file containing VMā700T commands ' ' declarations DECLARE FUNCTION ReadError! (return$) DECLARE FUNCTION ReadString (text$, start$, p$) DECLARE FUNCTION PutCmd! (Cmd$, return$) DECLARE FUNCTION getPrompt$ (i%) DECLARE SUB gettimeout (i%) DECLARE SUB VMError (c!, message$) ' ' preliminaries holdoff = 0 'used for XON/XOFF flow control xon$ = CHR$(17) 'used for XON/XOFF flow control xoff$ = CHR$(19) 'used for XON/XOFF flow control VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 return$ = "" fatalerror = 0 CLS ' get name of file to read commands from infile$ = "" WHILE infile$ = "" INPUT "Name of command file (input):", infile$ WEND OPEN infile$ FOR INPUT AS #2 ' get name of file to log results to outfile$ = "" WHILE outfile$ = "" INPUT "Name of log file (output):", outfile$ WEND OPEN outfile$ FOR OUTPUT AS #3 PRINT #3, DATE$ PRINT #3, TIME$ PRINT #3, "Input file:"; infile$ PRINT #3, "Output file:"; outfile$ ' setup OPEN "com1:9600,N,8,1,LF,DS0" FOR RANDOM AS #1 PRINT #1, "remote" prompt$ = getPrompt$(1) PRINT "Prompt: "; prompt$ PRINT #3, "Prompt: "; prompt$ 'main loop 'read lines from input file WHILE NOT (EOF(2)) AND fatalerror = 0 LINE INPUT #2, inputline$ IF inputline$ <> "" THEN PRINT inputline$ PRINT #3, inputline$ c = PutCmd!(inputline$, return$) IF c <> 0 THEN fatalerror = 1 IF c < 0 THEN PRINT "Error encountered:"; -c PRINT #3, "Error encountered:"; -c ELSE PRINT "Warning message:"; c PRINT #3, "Warning message:"; c END IF CALL VMError(c, message$) VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–23 Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 4–24 PRINT message$ PRINT #3, message$ IF c <> 7 AND c <> 8 AND c <> -17 THEN c = PutCmd!("quit", return$) END IF END IF IF fatalerror = 0 THEN d = 0 DO UNTIL d = 1 d = ReadString(c$, return$, prompt$) PRINT c$ PRINT #3, c$ LOOP PRINT prompt$; PRINT #3, prompt$; END IF END IF WEND IF fatalerror = 0 THEN PRINT:PRINT "End of input file reached" PRINT #3,:PRINT #3, "End of input file reached" PRINT "quit" PRINT #3, "quit" c = PutCmd!("quit", return$) IF c <> 0 THEN CALL VMError(c, message$) ELSE 'fatalerror=1 PRINT "Fatal error encountered" PRINT "Program terminated" PRINT #3, "Fatal error encountered" PRINT #3, "Program terminated" END IF CLOSE ALL END FUNCTION getPrompt$ (i%) SHARED holdoff SHARED xon$, xoff$ DO LOOP UNTIL NOT EOF(i%) loopa1: ' ' Check if the input buffer is up to 128 bytes. ' If it is, then send xoff to stop transmission ' IF LOC(i%) > 128 THEN holdoff = 1 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line PRINT #i%, xoff$; END IF 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 ' ' If there are characters to read in, then do so, ' IF LOC(i%) > 0 THEN c$ = INPUT$(LOC(i%), #1) text$ = text$ + c$ END IF ' ' If there are no more characters left, and tx has been held off, ' then turn it back on with xon. ' IF holdoff AND LOC(1) = 0 THEN holdoff = 0 PRINT #i%, xon$; END IF ' ' Check for eof, and loop for a while in case it was only momentary. ' IF NOT EOF(i%) THEN GOTO loopa1 FOR j = 1 TO 4000 IF NOT EOF(i%) THEN EXIT FOR NEXT ' ' If the loop was exited early, then continue with reading. ' IF j < 4000 THEN GOTO loopa1 getPrompt$ = text$ END FUNCTION FUNCTION PutCmd (Cmd$, return$) PRINT #1, Cmd$ PutCmd = ReadError(return$) END FUNCTION FUNCTION ReadError (return$) return$ = "" ErrCode = 0 ' Read in VMā700T Computer response DO UNTIL LOC(1) > 0 LOOP c$ = INPUT$(1, #1) IF c$ = "?" OR c$ = "!" THEN DO UNTIL LOC(1) >= 3 LOOP VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–25 Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 4–26 num$ = INPUT$(3, #1) ErrCode = VAL(num$) IF c$ = "?" THEN ErrCode = -ErrCode END IF ELSEIF c$ <> "@" THEN return$ = c$ END IF ReadError = ErrCode END FUNCTION FUNCTION ReadString (text$, start$, p$) SHARED holdoff SHARED xon$, xoff$ DO ' Wait until there are LOOP UNTIL NOT EOF(1) ' Characters to read. temp$ = start$ ' Initialize temp$ last = 0 ' Flag for prompt found p = 1 ' Initialize prompt count FOR i = 1 TO LEN(start$) temp2$ = MID$(start$, i, 1) temp3$ = MID$(p$, i, 1) IF temp2$ = temp3$ THEN p = p + 1 ELSE p = 1 NEXT done = 0 ' Set done flag to zero DO WHILE done = 0 ' ' Check if the input buffer is up to 128 bytes. ' If it is, then send xoff to stop transmission ' IF LOC(1) > 128 THEN holdoff = 1 PRINT #1, xoff$; END IF ' ' If there are characters to read in, then read one in. ' IF LOC(1) > 0 THEN c$ = INPUT$(1, #1) IF ASC(c$) = 10 THEN ' If linefeed, then done done = 1 ELSEIF ASC(c$) <> 13 THEN ' Skip carriage returns temp$ = temp$ + c$ ' Add it to string VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 d$ = MID$(p$, p, 1) IF d$ <> c$ THEN ' Is it part of prompt? p = 1 ' No ELSE IF p = LEN(p$) THEN ' Was it the whole prompt? done = 1 ' Yes found = 1 ' Prompt found text$ = MID$(temp$, 1, LEN(temp$) - p) ' Remove prompt ELSE p = p + 1 END IF END IF END IF END IF ' If there are no more characters left, and tx has ' been held off, then turn it back on with xon. IF holdoff AND LOC(1) = 0 THEN holdoff = 0 PRINT #1, xon$; END IF ' ' Check for eof, and loop for a while in case it was only momentary. IF EOF(1) AND NOT done THEN FOR j = 1 TO 4000 IF NOT EOF(1) THEN EXIT FOR NEXT ' If the loop was exited early, then continue reading. IF j > 4000 THEN EXIT DO END IF LOOP IF found = 0 THEN text$ = temp$ ' Line if data without prompt ReadString = found END FUNCTION SUB VMError (c!, message$) SELECT CASE c! CASE -1 message$ = "Bad command argument" CASE -2 message$ = "Sub-function not found" CASE -3 message$ = "Playback nesting too deep" CASE -4 message$ = "Function directory inaccessible" CASE -5 message$ = "Function not found" VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–27 Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 4–28 CASE -6 message$ CASE -7 message$ CASE -8 message$ CASE -9 message$ CASE -10 message$ CASE -11 message$ CASE -12 message$ CASE -13 message$ CASE -14 message$ CASE -15 message$ CASE -16 message$ CASE -17 message$ CASE -101 message$ CASE -102 message$ CASE -103 message$ CASE -104 message$ CASE -105 message$ CASE -106 message$ CASE -107 message$ CASE -108 message$ CASE -109 message$ CASE -110 message$ CASE -111 = "Unknown command" = "Unknown hardkey" = "Out of memory" = "Recursive function call" = "Bad command in this context" = "Name too long" = "No filename" = "Line too long" = "Command only meaningful for non-IP connections" = "Bad time format (use getclock)" = "Function playback in progress. Type ^C to stop it." = "Remote not enabled" = "Request filtered" = "Screen event not key" = "Unknown softkey" = "Invalid softkey" = "Unwanted hardkey" = "Unknown input" = "Not found" = "Request not supported" = "No server resources" = "Illegal name" VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.) Line 290 295 300 305 message$ CASE -112 message$ CASE -113 message$ CASE -114 message$ CASE 5 message$ CASE 6 message$ CASE 7 message$ CASE 8 message$ CASE 10 message$ END SELECT END SUB = "Not writable" = "Not readable" = "No permission" = "Bad argument(s)" = "Error occurred in function playback" = "Type carriage return to continue" = "Remote terminated" = "Remote has been terminated locally" = "Application returned error status" Lines 68 through 78 handle the case where PutCmd returns a zero value, such as where the last command executed successfully. Line 71 calls function ReadĆ String to read characters from the VM700T and print them, both on the screen and into the output file, until it sees the VM700T prompt. Lines 80 through 86 print appropriate messages, both on the screen and in the output log file, when the end of the input file is reached. Lines 88 through 92 print appropriate messages, both on the screen and in the output log file, when program execution is halted because of a VM700T error condition. Function GetPrompt Function GetPrompt reads characters from the VM700T until the VM700T stops sending characters. The characters it reads in are assumed to be the VM700T prompt, which the VM700T uses to signal end-of-transmission. Lines 96 through 98 declare variables holdoff, xon$ and xoff$ to be “shared” variables. Shared variables share their values with other procedures and functions and with the main program. These are similar to “static” variables in other programming languages. Lines 100 through 108 check to see if the input buffer is past the “critical” point, defined as 128 bytes. (The LOC function returns the number of characters in the input buffer for a specified communications channel.) If the input buffer contains VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–29 Computer-Based Remote Control 128 bytes or more, the program sets the value of variable holdoff to 1 (“true”), then sends the XOFF character to the VM700T. Lines 110 through 115 read a line of input from the VM700T into variable c$, then appends the contents of c$ to variable text$. Lines 117 through 123 check to see if the input buffer is empty and the variable holdoff is set to 1. If both of these conditions hold, the programs sets holdoff to 0 and sends the XON character to the VM700T. Lines 127 loops back to line 100 if “end-of-file” has not been seen from the VM700T. Lines 128 through 130 simply delay to give the VM700T a chance to transmit another character, in order to avoid spurious end-of-transmission readings. Line 134 tests to see if the FOR...NEXT loop in lines 128 through 130 was exited early. If it was, the program loops back to line 100. Otherwise, line 135 assigns the contents of variable text$ to function GetPrompt, and line 136 returns from the function call. Function PutCmd Function ReadError Function PutCmd sends a string out the COM1 port to the VM700T, then calls function ReadError to see if the VM700T accepts the string as a command. Function ReadError reads characters from the VM700T to determine if a command sent by PutCmd caused a VM700T error condition. If the first character that ReadError reads is an “@” character, the command was successful. If the first character that ReadError reads is a “?” or “!” character, the command caused an error condition or returned a warning. ReadError reads the next three characters and returns them in ErrCode. If the first character that ReadError reads is not an “@”, “?”, or “!”, then a playback command is executing, and the first character is probably the first character of the VM700T prompt string. It is returned in variable return$ for special handling by the calling routine in this instance. Function ReadString Function Readstring reads characters from the VM700T until it reads the VM700T prompt. It then returns all characters read up to the start of the VM700T prompt. Parameter text$ contains the string that ReadString returns. Parameter start$ contains the string that ReadString starts out with when it is called. This is usually the null string, but may also contain characters returned by a previous call to ReadError. 4–30 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Computer-Based Remote Control Parameter p$ contains the VM700T prompt string. Characters read in from the VM700T are compared to this string to see if the end of the VM700T transmission has been reached. If ReadString finds the VM700T prompt, it returns a value of 1. If it times out without finding the VM700T prompt, it returns a value of 0. Sub VMError Subroutine VMError takes a number as input and returns an error or warning message corresponding to that number. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–31 Computer-Based Remote Control 4–32 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation A common use of the remote capabilities of the VM700T is to monitor Automode measurements and print a warning message when test results are out of limits. When doing this, it is important to remember that remote monitoring is different from remote control. The VM700T doesn’t have to be in remote mode to allow you to monitor tests. You can simply attach a printer or terminal to the VM700T log port to monitor test results. If you want to monitor Auto mode measurements while the VM700T is under remote control, you must avoid sending commands to the VM700T at the same time that the VM700T is sending log data to the computer. Doing so can cause the two data streams (log data and commands) to interfere with each other, with unpredictable results. The following sections explain how to monitor Auto mode operation, in remote mode or otherwise. Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation Without Remote Control To monitor Auto mode operation without putting the VM700T under remote control, use the following procedure: 1. Attach the monitoring device (printer, terminal, data logger, or similar device) to the Log port of the VM700T. To find out which port is the Log port, check the Log Port entry in the Communication Setup file. 2. In the Communication Setup file, set the format of the Log port to an appropriate setting for the monitoring device (for example, ASCII Printer, PostScript, Epson LQ, or Parallel). 3. Press the Auto button. A message appears on the monitoring device when a measurement falls outside its alarm limits, or when a measurement transitions from outside its alarm limits to within its alarm limits. Refer to Consecutive Errors Parameter on page 4–34 for more information about when a measurement is logged. Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation With Remote Control To monitor Auto mode operation when the VM700T is under remote control, use the following procedure: 1. Set the Remote Control port and the Log port to the same serial port in the Communication Setup file. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–33 Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control 2. Establish a connection between the PC and the VM700T. 3. Execute the Auto measurement. 4. Read the prompt from the VM700T, indicating that the command to execute Auto mode has been received. 5. Wait for further response from the VM700T. This will be a message indicating that an alarm limit has been violated. 6. Take appropriate action with the alarm message (for example, write it into a file or branch to another section of program). The following topic, Consecutive Errors Parameter, has more information about when a measurement is logged. Consecutive Errors Parameter The VM700T sends a message out the Log port when on of the following actions occurs: a measurement transitions from within its alarm limits to outside its alarm limits a measurement transitions from outside its alarm limits to within its alarm limits The “consecutive errors before reporting” parameter specified in the current Auto Limits file controls the frequency with which log messages are sent. For a log message to be sent concerning a measurement, that measurement must fall outside its alarm limits for the number of Auto mode cycles specified by the consecutive errors parameter. (An Auto-mode cycle is a single pass through the currently selected Auto-mode measurements.) Once a log message is sent warning of an out-of-limits measurement, the next message concerning that measurement will be sent only if the measurement falls within its alarm limits for the number of Auto mode cycles specified by the consecutive errors parameter. Successive messages about a measurement continue in this fashion, one indicating that an alarm limit has been violated, the next indicating that the measurement has returned to its alarm limit range. This method of operation keeps the data monitoring device from being bombarded with a stream of repetitive alarm-violation messages. 4–34 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control Modem Control If you connect the VM700T remote port to a modem, you can set up functions that dial the modem, acquire a carrier signal, transmit data over a telephone line, and hang up the telephone. In order to use the VM700T in this way, the modem must be set up to meet certain requirements: The Control Command The modem must be silent. It must not issue characters to be read by the VM700T, or echo back characters sent to it by the VM700T. This means, for instance, that Hayes-compatible modems should be set to not return results codes, and to not echo received characters. The modem should use hardware flow control to signal readiness to receive data, or to halt data transmission from the VM700T. The control command sends a specified string of characters out the VM700T Control port. (Note: The Control port referred to in the previous sentence is not the same as the Remote Control port. It is a distinct entry in the Communication Setup file.) You typically use control to send commands to a modem or switcher. The string can be any sequence of ASCII characters, or any of the following: ^x a control character, $nn \$ \^ \\ \<LF> such as, ^G (bell) or ^M (carriage return) a hexadecimal number, where n is 0-9, A-F, or a-f the `$" character the `^' character the `\' character a trailing `\' on a line says to ignore end-of-line Note that communication through the control command is one-way only. There is no feed-back from the controlled device. This means that if the controlled device is not powered on, or is not even attached, or is sent an incorrect string, the VM700T function or program will continue executing. Note also that the control statement does not add characters to delimit messages. Thus, if the device being controlled requires that messages be delimited with a carriage return, line , or carriage-return/line-feed sequence, those characters must be included in the string accompanying the control command. Examples: VM700T> control ^G This example sends a bell character out the Control Port. VM700T> control ATDT123-4567^M This example sends the ASCII string “ATDT123–4567”, followed by carriage return, out the Control Port. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–35 Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control The ? and ?! Constructs The ? construct is followed by any configuration keyword and a single command. During function playback, if the keyword has non-zero value, the rest of the line following the ? construct is executed. Otherwise,function execution continues with the next statement in the function. The ?! construct is similar, except that the rest of the line is executed if the keyword has a value of zero. Otherwise,function execution continues with the next statement in the function. The ? and ?! constructs are available only during function playback. They are typically used to test the value of a Carrier Detect line in order to control communications with a modem, or to test the global out-of-limits (GOOL) flag to see if an application found one or more measurements that were out-of-limits. Example: ?GCD0 return delay 5 loop This first line of this example tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on serial port 0. If the test returns true, the function returns to its caller. If it returns false, the function waits one half-second, then loops back to the first command. A “Generic” Modem Control Function Functions that dial up a telephone line, send data, then hang up the telephone take a standard form composed of the following four parts: send the modem the command to dial the telephone wait until the telephone connection is established send the data hang up the telephone The following discussion demonstrates the use of each of these parts. The Main Function. The following function sends a command to a modem to dial a telephone number, calls a function that waits until the telephone connection is established, runs the H_Timing measurement, obtains its results, sends the results over the telephone line, then hangs up the phone: control ATDT123-4567^M delay 10 playback waitforCD execute H_Timing getresults spool H_Timing playback hangup 4–36 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control Note that the control command does not delimit the sequence of characters it sends by a carriage return or line feed. Therefore, a carriage return (^M) had to be appended to the string sent by the control command. Note also that the spool command sends the contents of the H_Timing measurement results file out the Copy port. Thus, the Copy port and the Control port must be configured to the same physical port if this function is to work. The waitforCD Function. The Main function shown above called a function called “waitforCD” immediately after sending the command to the modem to dial the telephone. The waitforCD function simply consists of a test to see if Carrier Detect is high, followed by an immediate return from the function if the test returns true, or a short delay and a loop back to the start if the test returns false: ?GCD0 return delay 5 loop The hangup Function. To disconnect a telephone connection, Hayes-compatible modems must send three “attention” characters (by default, these are plus signs), followed by the command ath, followed by a carriage return. A brief delay between each attention character makes sure it is received properly and the modem takes appropriate action. Note that the ?GCD0 and ?GCD1 commands refer to physical and not logical ports. Thus, if the Copy port is ever changed from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0, any functions using the ?GCD0 or ?GCD1 commands will have to be changed as well. control + delay 4 control + delay 4 control + delay 20 control ath^M VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–37 Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control 4–38 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Functions VM700T functions are user-defined sequences of commands. Functions can be recorded as a sequence of front-panel actions, or edited with the VM700T on-screen function editor. Once a function is stored in the VM700T, it can be executed from the front panel by pressing the Function button, followed by touching the soft key corresponding to the function. Functions can also be executed from remote operation. Functions can be used to execute a sequence of commands repeatedly and reliably. They are also useful as programming aids. Sometimes, the best way to find out a command sequence to send over remote control is to record a function that performs the same action, and then examine the function to see how it works. Lastly, functions can also be used as building blocks to be called from within remote programs (or other functions). Programs are much smaller and easier to write if they can simply play back a sequence of prerecorded functions. The Function Keys Directory The Function Keys directory (/nvram0/FunctionKeys) contains user-defined functions, the Timed Events directory, and user-created directories that can contain other functions. To display the Function Keys directory, do the following: 1. If the VM700T is in Configure mode, press the Configure button to exit it. 2. Press the Configure button. 3. Touch the soft key. This displays the FunctionKeys directory and the Function Keys menu (Figure 4–1). Delete Create Directory Create Function Rename Print File Leave Directory Figure 4–1: Function Keys menu You can use the Function Keys directory window and the main Function Keys menu to create functions, view functions, edit functions, print functions, delete functions, create subdirectories, delete subdirectories, and rename functions or subdirectories. The rest of this section describes each of these operations. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–39 Functions Creating Functions To create a new function from the front panel, bring up the Function Keys directory and main Function Keys menu. Then, touch the Create Function soft key. This brings up an on-screen keyboard (see Figure 4–2) that you can use to type in the name of the new function. Please enter Function Key name (max 31 characters) q w a s z Cancel e r d x Set1 t f c Set2 y g v u h b Space Bar i o j n k p l Back Space Return m Shift Done Figure 4–2: VM700T on-screen keyboard When you name the function to be created, keep the following rules in mind: 4–40 No spaces are allowed in the name; use an _ (underline) or . (dot) to separate words in a name. Use only upper and lower case letters, numerals, and the following special characters: _ (underline), . (dot), – (minus sign), + (plus sign, : (colon), and ~ (tilde) in names. Forward slash (/) and reverse slash (\) are not permitted in the function name. Use the Return key to place a word on the second line of the name. The ‘~’ key also places a word on the second line of the name. For example, typing “Transmitter~Functions” would place the word “Functions” below “Transmitter” when the icon for the function appears in the Function Keys directory. A maximum of 31 characters are allowed in a name. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Functions When neither Set1 nor Set2 is highlighted, you can type lowercase and uppercase English alphabet characters. The lowercase Set1 character set allows you to enter numerals and punctuation characters. The uppercase Set1 and the Set2 character set allow you to enter various special characters and accented characters for use in non-English language function names. Both the Set1 and Set2 character keys and the Shift soft key “lock” when selected. Set1 and Set2 are unlocked by touching the same key again or touching the unselected key of the pair. Shift is unlocked by touching Shift again. After typing the name, touch Done. Press Cancel to quit the process without creating the function. Learn Mode If you entered a name for the function, the VM700T goes into learn mode. The LED on the Configure button blinks while to indicate this. In learn mode, the VM700T records all user interactions with the front panel. The VM700T displays the Learn Mode menu (Figure 4–3), containing soft keys used in recording functions. The learn mode soft keys are described below. Pause Insert Message End Loop Abort Figure 4–3: Learn Mode menu ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Pause Selecting the Pause soft key suspends function recording. This allows you to press VM700T controls without making those actions part of the recorded function. (The subsequent state of the VM700T, however, is recorded.) When you want to resume function recording, press the Configure button, touch Pause a second time, and press the Configure button again. Insert Message Selecting the Insert Message soft key displays the on-screen keyboard, with which you can enter a message of up to four lines of 76 characters each. When the function plays back, the message will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen at the appropriate point in the playback sequence. When the message appears, function playback pauses and the message “Press screen to continue” is also displayed. Touch any point on the screen to continue function playback. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–41 Functions ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ End Selecting the End soft key terminates function recording. The VM700T remains in the Function Keys directory in Configure mode. When executed, a Function Key terminated with End plays back once and stops. Loop Selecting the Loop soft key terminates function recording. The VM700T remains in the Function Keys directory in Configure mode. When executed, a Function Key terminated with Loop plays back continuously until halted by pressing the Function button again. Abort Selecting the Abort soft key during function recording deletes the function you were creating. Editing Functions To edit a function once it has been learned, bring up the Function Keys directory and main Function Keys menu. Then, touch the icon corresponding to the function you wish to edit. This brings up the Function Editing menu (Figure 4–4). Update & Exit Insert Line Delete Line No change & Exit Figure 4–4: Function editing menu To edit a line: 1. Highlight the line to be edited, using the control knob (that is, rotate the knob until the line you wish to edit appears in the center of the screen, brighter than the surrounding lines). 2. Touch the line. The on-screen keyboard appears. 3. Use the knob, the backspace key, and other keys of the on-screen keyboard to modify the line. 4. Touch Done when you have finished editing the line. To insert a line: 1. Highlight the line following the insertion point, using the control knob (that is, rotate the knob until the line after the insertion point appears in the center of the screen, brighter than the surrounding lines). 2. Touch the Insert Line soft key. The on-screen keyboard appears. 4–42 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Functions 3. Enter the new line, using the on-screen keyboard. 4. Touch Done when the new line is completed. To delete a line: 1. Highlight the line to be deleted, using the control knob (that is, rotate the knob until the line to be deleted appears in the center of the screen, brighter than the surrounding lines). 2. Touch the Delete Line soft key. To save changes and exit: Touch the Update & Exit soft key. To exit without saving changes: 1. Touch the No Change & Exit soft key. 2. If you have made changes to the function, a message appears on the screen, warning you that the function has been changed. Adding Comments to a Function Annotating a Function If you really don’t want to save the changes, touch the No Change & Exit soft key again. If you want to save the changes instead, touch the Update & Exit soft key. You can add comments to a function by preceding the comment with a “#” (pound sign) character. Any characters appearing on a line after a “#” character are ignored. You can annotate a function (that is, you can add descriptive text explaining what the function does) with up to three lines of text. The annotation text appears when you press the Function button on the front panel. To annotate a function: 1. Bring up the function for editing. From the Function Keys directory, touch the icon corresponding to the function to be edited. 2. Insert a line at the beginning of the function, by highlighting the first line of the function and touching the Insert Line soft key. 3. Type the text of the annotation line, making sure that the first character is a “#” (pound sign) character. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, if desired, to insert up to three annotation lines. 5. Touch the Update & Exit soft key to save changes to the function. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–43 Functions The annotation text (that is, the first one, two, or three lines of comments, inserted as defined above) will appear next to the icon for the function when you press the Function button on the front panel. Speeding Up or Slowing Down a Function When you record a function from the front panel, it plays back EXACTLY the way you recorded it-including the delay time between actions. This time is recorded in the form of commands that appear in the function. The argument following each command is the amount of time, in tenths of seconds, for the function to pause before continuing execution. Editing the argument following each command, or deleting the command altogether, is an easy way to speed up or slow down function playback. Note, however, that some measurements take a certain amount of time to set up before their results become valid (or, in some cases, before they can obtain results at all). Therefore, it is a good idea to reduce, but not eliminate, the delay time following most or commands. Another useful way to modify the timing of a function is to change commands to commands. While commands only specify an amount by which to turn the knob, commands specify both an amount to turn the knob and a time over which to turn it continuously. Thus, while commands execute near-instantaneously, commands execute over a user-specified period of time (given in tenths of seconds). commands are most useful when you want to watch the progress of the function while you are turning the knob. commands, conversely, are most useful when you simply want to turn the knob, then observe the result or perform another action. Function Playback Once recorded, functions can be played back from the front panel or from remote operation. The following sections describe both kinds of function playback operation. Function Playback from the Front Panel To play back a function from the VM700T Front Panel: 1. Press the Function button. 2. Touch the icon corresponding to the function you wish to play back. The VM700T performs the sequence of actions you recorded, taking almost exactly the same amount of time as when it was recorded. (See Speeding Up or Slowing Down a Function, on page 4–44, if you want to modify the time the function takes to run.) The Function button LED flashes while a function is being played back. Pressing the Function button during function playback cancels the playback, and it leaves the VM700T in the state it was in when function playback was cancelled. 4–44 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Functions If there is a playback error, or if a disptext command is encountered, an appropriate message is displayed on the bottom of the VM700T screen, along with a request that the screen be touched to continue playback. When you execute a function terminated with End, the function plays back once and exits. When you execute a function terminated with Loop, the function loops continuously until the Function button is pressed to cancel playback. The restoreconfig command is added by default to functions create with the Create Function soft key. This command restores various VM700T operating parameters to the values contained in the configuration files. If you wish, you can delete this command when editing the function. When you abort a function, a restoreconfig command is always executed automatically. Function Playback from Remote Operation To play back a function from remote operation, send the playback command: VMā700T> playback functionĆname If the function is in a subdirectory, the directory name must be included in the argument to the playback command. For example, if the function is named TransDGDP and is stored in directory Special~Measurements within the Function Keys directory, the playback command would be: VMā700T> playback Special~Measurements/TransDGDP When a function is playing back remotely, it can be terminated by pressing Ctrl-C on the remote keyboard, or by pressing the Configure button on the front panel (which also terminates the remote control session). If the “Message Display:” line in the Communication~Setup file is set to “VM700 Screen”, a message appears when the playback command is first issued, telling you that function playback is in progress and how to stop it: VMā700T> playback Special~Measurements/TransDGDP Function playback in progress. Enter ^C to stop it. If the function finishes normally, the following message appears: Function playback completed If function playback is terminated with a Ctrl-C, the following message appears: Function playback terminated If there is a playback error, or if a disptext command is encountered, an appropriate message is displayed. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–45 Functions If the Message Display line in the Communications~Setup file is set to VM700 Screen, error messages or text from disptext commands are displayed on the VM700T screen. To continue function playback, touch the screen. If the Message Display line in the Communications~Setup file is set to Remote, error messages or text from disptext commands are displayed on the terminal screen, followed by the message Hit CR to continue Pressing return on the remote terminal displays the following message: Function playback continues... Function Playback on Power Up There is a special function file that can be created for use on powering up the VM700T. The Powerup function file is looked for by the VM700T as part of the initialization process, and, if found, played back immediately after initialization has finished. The powerup function file is created in exactly the same manner as other function files. If there is a state or measurement mode you want the VM700T to be in or series of measurements that needs to be done after power is either turned on or restored after a power loss, the powerup function key file may be used to perform the required steps. Subdirectories If you have many functions defined in the Function Keys directory, it is often convenient to store them in subdirectories. This reduces clutter in the Function Keys directory window, and makes it easier to find the function you want for a specific task. Creating Subdirectories To create a new subdirectory in the Function Keys directory (or in any of its subdirectories), use the following steps: 1. Bring up the Function Keys directory by pressing the Configure button, then touching the Function Keys soft key. If you wish to create a subdirectory within an existing subdirectory of the Function Keys directory, touch the icon(s) of the sequence of subdirectories until the VM700T screen displays the subdirectory in which you will create the new subdirectory. 2. Touch the Create Directory soft key. The VM700T displays the on-screen keyboard that you can use to type in the name for the new subdirectory. When typing in a subdirectory name, follow the same rules as for typing in function names (listed in Creating Functions on page 4–40). 4–46 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Functions Traversing the Directory Hierarchy You can think of the Function Keys directory and its subdirectories as being organized in a hierarchy, with the Function Keys directory at the top, any subdirectories it contains on the next level below, any subdirectories contained in the subdirectories on the next level below and so forth (see Figure 4–5). Function Keys Function Subdirectory Function Function Subdirectory Function Function Function Function Figure 4–5: Function Keys directory hierarchy To travel down the hierarchy (that is, from a directory to one of its subdirectories), touch the icon corresponding to the directory you wish to see. To travel up the hierarchy (that is, from a subdirectory to the directory the next level above), touch the Leave Directory soft key at the bottom right of the screen. Deleting Functions and Subdirectories To delete a function or empty subdirectory, bring up the main Function Key menu, then touch the Delete soft key, followed by the icon corresponding to the function or directory. The VM700T beeps at one-second intervals while the selected icon slowly disintegrates on the screen. Once the disintegration starts, you have six seconds to cancel the Delete command, either by touching the Delete soft key again or by touching the screen anywhere inside the directory window. Canceling the Delete process leaves the function or subdirectory intact (nothing is deleted). A directory that is not empty cannot be deleted. Its icon disintegrates, but reappears after the disintegration process completes. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual 4–47 Functions Renaming Functions and Subdirectories To rename a function or subdirectory, bring up the main Function Key menu, then touch the Rename soft key, followed by the icon corresponding to the icon or function to be renamed. The on-screen keyboard appears, allowing you to type the new function or directory name. When typing in a new name, follow the naming rules listed in Creating Functions starting on page 4–40. Printing Function Contents To print the contents of a function, bring up the main Function Key menu, then touch the Print File soft key, followed by the icon corresponding to the function to be printed. You can cancel the print request by entering the main Configure menu (you may have to press the Configure button twice), and then selecting the Cancel Copy soft key. 4–48 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendices Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords This appendix documents the keywords used with the get and set commands. For each get/set keyword letter-group, it gives the syntax of the set command and the get result, an explanation of what the keywords in the letter-group do, and one or more examples of the use of keywords from the group. This is followed by an alphabetized table of all the keywords in the group and their meaning. For the Option 1S Get/Set keywords, refer to page A–99. NOTE. The remote commands and keywords are case sensitive. Option 1S introduces lower case keywords to the VM700T measurement set. Be sure to enter the commands and keywords exactly as they appear in this manual. In the following descriptions, VM700T> is a prompt (which you can edit), not a required input. “A” Group: Audio Configuration “A” keywords report on or set the values of Audio Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on a VM700T equipped with Option 40 (Audio). Get commands used with the “A” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channel-letter> Set commands used with “A” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “A” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–1: “A” keywords: Audio Configuration ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description A33T 0.33 test level ALEM Level Meter ADAA Dead Air Alarm ALIL Lineup level AERR Error reporting ALIM Audio Limit File AEXT External termination ALIS Lissajous display AHPT Audio Printout Title ARIA Report in Auto VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–1 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords A33T A33T specifies the 0.33 Test Level in dBu. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are integers from –6 to 14. VM700T> get A33T A 0 VM700T> set A33T A 1 VM700T> ADAA ADAA specifies the amount of time the VM700T waits before it reports an error when it encounters a period of silence. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are: disabled, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 30 min, or 60 min. Disabled is the default. VM700T> get ADAA A disabled VM700T> set ADAA A 1 min VM700T> AERR AERR specifies whether or not audio errors for the specified audio source should be added to the video error report. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are enabled or disabled. Disabled is the default. VM700T> get AERR A enabled VM700T> set AERR A disabled VM700T> AEXT AEXT informs the VM700T about the value of the VM700T’s external termination. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are: 50, 75, 125, 150, 300, 600, 10k. VM700T> get AEXT A 600 VM700T> set AEXT 10k AHPT AHPT specifies the title that appears on audio report printouts. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 50 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character. VM700T> get AHPT A VM700T> Audio Measurements VM700T> set AHPT A Fred's Audio Measurements VM700T> get AHPT A Fred's Audio Measurements VM700T> A–2 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords ALEM ALEM specifies the meter ballistics for the bar-graph level meters in the Audio Monitor display. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are: PPM:DIN45406, PPM:NORDIC, PPM:TEK7601, or VU. The default is PPM:DIN45406. VM700T> get ALEM A PPM:DIN4506 VM700T> set ALEM A PPM:TEK760 VM700T> get ALEM A PPM:TEK760 VM700T> ALIL ALIL specifies the meter equivalency in dBu for the VU and dBu scales used in the Audio Monitor display. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are integers from –10 to 10. The default is 0. VM700T> get ALIL A 0 VM700T> set ALIL A 1 VM700T> ALIM ALIM specifies the Audio Limit File used by the VM700T. The set command takes one argument, the name of the file, after the channel letter. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Audio_Limit~Files. VM700T> get ALIM A System~Default VM700T> set ALIM A ShortHaul VM700T> get ALIM A ShortHaul VM700T> ALIS ALIS specifies the type of Lissajous display used in the Audio Monitor. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are x/y or soundstage. The default is soundstage. VM700T> get ALIS A soundstage VM700T> set ALIS A x/y VM700T> get ALIS A x/y VM700T> 1 Similar to the Tektronix 760 meter, but with its –8 dB tick mark labeled “TEST.” The lineup level is at the TEST (–8 dB) tick on this meter. Ballistics are the same as for the DIN 45406 meter. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–3 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords ARIA ARIA tells the VM700T whether or not to display an audio report in Video Auto mode. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are enabled or disabled. Disabled is the default. VM700T> get ARIA A disabled VM700T> set ARIA A enabled disabled VM700T> get ARIA A enabled VM700T> “B” Group: Audio Limit Files “B” keywords report on or set the measurement limits for Audio auto Mode measurements. These keywords can only be used on a VM700T equipped with Option 40 (Audio). Get commands used with the “B” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “B” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “B” group keywords is documented in this section. A–4 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–2: “B” keywords: Audio Limit Files ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description BARF Amplitude response frequency breaks BHDL3 Total harmonic distortion lower limit BARL Amplitude response lower limit BHDU3 Total harmonic distortion upper limit Amplitude response upper limit BHHF2 THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB frequency breaks ANSI crosstalk plus noise limits BHHL2 THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB lower limit Compandor error (fall) BHHU2 THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB upper limit Compandor error (rise) BHLF2 THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB frequency breaks Crosstalk plus noise BHLL2 THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB lower limit Channel separation frequency breaks BHLU2 THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB upper limit THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB frequency breaks BARU BAXT1 BCEF BCER BCRT3 BCSF2 BCSL2 Channel separation lower limit BHMF2 BCSU2 Channel separation upper limit BHML2 THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB lower limit BCTF2 Crosstalk plus noise frequency breaks BHMU2 THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB upper limit BCTL2 Crosstalk plus noise lower limit BING Insertion gain BCTU2 Crosstalk plus noise upper limit BSNR Signal to noise ratio BGDF Stereo gain difference frequency breaks BSPF Stereo phase difference frequency breaks BGDL Stereo gain difference lower limit BSPL Stereo phase difference lower limit BGDU Stereo gain difference upper limit BSPU Stereo phase difference upper limit BHDF3 Total harmonic distortion frequency breaks ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1 Valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.04 and above only. 2 Valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. 3 Valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.00 only. BARF BARF sets the frequencies of the break points for the amplitude response vs. frequency measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> 20 50 VM700T> VM700T> 30 60 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual get BARF A 250 251 1000 10000 10001 20000 set BARF A 30 60 300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000 get BARF A 300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000 A–5 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BARL BARL sets the lower amplitude limits of the break points for the amplitude response vs. frequency measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –100 and 100, inclusive. VM700T> get BARL A -1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -0.30 -0.30 -0.30 -1.00 -1.00 VM700T> set BARL A -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 0 0 0 -0.5 -0.5 VM700T> get BARL A -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 0 0 0 -0.5 -0.5 VM700T> BARU BARU sets the upper amplitude limits of the break points for the amplitude response vs. frequency measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of each break point. Each number must be between –100 and 100, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.30 0.30 VM700T> set VM700T> get 0.50 0.50 VM700T> BAXT BARU A 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 BARU A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 BARU A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 The BAXT command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.04 and above only. BAXT sets the upper and lower limits of the ANSI crosstalk plus noise measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower and upper limit (in dB). Each number can be between 0.00 and 5.00, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get BAXT A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> set BAXT A 1.00 4.00 VM700T> get BAXT A VM700T> 1.00 4.00 VM700T> A–6 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BCEF BCEF specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the difference between the measured compandor response of the signal and the expected response on a high-to-low transition. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are floating point numbers in the range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get BCEF A --- 0.50 VM700T> set BCEF A undef VM700T> get BCEF A --- 0.75 VM700T> BCER BCER specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the difference between the measured compandor response of the signal and the expected response on a low-to-high transition. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are floating point numbers in the range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get BCER A --- 0.50 VM700T> set BCER A undef VM700T> get BCER A --- 0.75 VM700T> BCRT 0.75 0.75 The BCRT command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.00 only. BCRT specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the crosstalk plus noise measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are floating point numbers in the range –120 to 0, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get BCRT A --- -50.00 VM700T> set BCRT A undef VM700T> get BCRT A --- -75.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual -75.00 A–7 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BCSF The BCSF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BCSF sets the frequency break points of the Channel Separation measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> get BCSF A 20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000 VM700T> set BCSF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> get BCSF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> BCSL The BCSL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BCSL sets the lower limits of the Channel Separation break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –140 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get BCSL A -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 VM700T> set BCSL A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 VM700T> get BCSL A -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 VM700T> BCSU The BCSU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BCSU sets the upper limits of the Channel Separation break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –140 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get BCSU A -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 VM700T> set BCSU A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 VM700T> get BCSU A -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 VM700T> A–8 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BCTF The BCTF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BCTF sets the frequency break points of the Crosstalk plus noise measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> get BCTF A 20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000 VM700T> set BCTF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> get BCTF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> BCTL The BCTL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BCTL sets the lower limits of the Crosstalk plus noise measurement break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –120 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get BCTL A -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 VM700T> set BCTL A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 VM700T> get BCTL A -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 VM700T> BCTU The BCTU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BCTU sets the upper limits of the Crosstalk plus noise break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –120 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get BCTU A -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 VM700T> set BCTU A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 VM700T> get BCTU A -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–9 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BGDF BGDF sets the frequencies of the break points for the stereo gain difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> 20 50 VM700T> VM700T> 20 50 VM700T> BGDL get BGDF A 250 251 1000 10000 10001 20000 set BGDF A 20 50 300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000 get BGDF A 300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000 BGDL sets the lower amplitude limits of the break points for the stereo gain difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –60 and 60, inclusive. VM700T> get BGDL A -1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -0.30 -0.30 -0.30 -1.00 -1.00 VM700T> set BGDL A -1 -0.5 -0.5 -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 -0.5 -1 VM700T> get BGDL A -1.00 -0.5 -0.5 -0.30 -0.30 -0.30 -0.5 -1.00 VM700T> BGDU BGDU sets the upper amplitude limits of the break points for the stereo gain difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –60 and 60, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.30 0.30 VM700T> set VM700T> get 0.50 0.50 VM700T> BHDF The BHDF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.00 only. BHDF sets the frequencies of the break points for the harmonic distortion measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> 20 50 VM700T> VM700T> 20 50 A–10 BGDU A 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 BGDU A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 BGDU A 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 get BHDF A 200 400 1000 2000 4000 6000 set BHDF A 20 50 300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600 get BHDF A 300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BHDL The BHDL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.00 only. BHDL sets the lower amplitude limits of the break points for the harmonic distortion measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –120 and 120, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get -5.0 -5.0 VM700T> BHDU The BHDU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.00 only. BHDU sets the upper amplitude limits of the break points for the harmonic distortion measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –120 and 120, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.30 0.30 VM700T> set VM700T> get 0.50 0.50 VM700T> BHHF BHDL A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHDL A -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 BHDL A -5.0 -5.0 -5.0 -5.0 -5.0 -5.0 BHDU A 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.50 BHDU A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 BHDU A0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 The BHHF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHHF sets the frequency break points of the THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> get BHHF A 20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000 VM700T> set BHHF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> get BHHF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–11 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BHHL The BHHL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHHL sets the lower limits of the THD + N, TEST greater than +14 break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 4.00 4.00 VM700T> BHHU The BHHU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHHU sets the upper limits of the THD + N, TEST greater than +14 break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 4.00 4.00 VM700T> BHLF BHHL A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHHL A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BHHL A 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 BHHU A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHHU A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BHHU A 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 The BHLF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHLF sets the frequency break points of the THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> get BHLF A 20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000 VM700T> set BHLF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> get BHLF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> A–12 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BHLL The BHLL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHHL sets the lower limits of the THD + N, TEST up to +9 break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 4.00 4.00 VM700T> BHLU The BHLU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHLU sets the upper limits of the THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 4.00 4.00 VM700T> BHMF BHLL A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHLL A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BHLL A 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 BHLU A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHLU A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BHLU A 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 The BHMF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHMF sets the frequency break points of the THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14dB measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> get BHMF A 20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000 VM700T> set BHMF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> get BHMF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–13 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BHML The BHML command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHML sets the lower limits of the THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 4.00 4.00 VM700T> BHMU The BHMU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only. BHMU sets the upper limits of the THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB break points. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 4.00 4.00 VM700T> BING BHML A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHML A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BHML A 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 BHMU A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BHMU A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BHMU A 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 BING specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the difference between the actual and the expected audio signal level. Legal values are floating point numbers in the range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get BING A -0.50 0.50 VM700T> get BING A -0.75 0.75 VM700T> get BING A -0.75 0.75 VM700T> A–14 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords BSNR BSNR specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for both the weighted and unweighted signal-to-noise ratios. Legal values are floating point numbers in the range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get BSNR A 70.00 --VM700T> set BSNR A 75.00 undef VM700T> get BSNR A 75.00 --VM700T> BSPF BSPF sets the frequencies of the break points for the stereo phase measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive. VM700T> 20 50 VM700T> VM700T> 20 50 VM700T> BSPL get BSPF A 200 400 1000 2000 4000 6000 set BSPF A 20 50 300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600 get BSPF A 300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600 BSPL sets the amplitudes of the lower limits at the break points for the stereo phase difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) at a break point. Each number must be between –180 and 180, inclusive. VM700T> get 0.00 0.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 1.00 1.00 VM700T> BSPU BSPL A 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BSPL A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BSPL A 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 BSPU sets the amplitudes of the upper limits at the break points for the stereo phase difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) at a break point. Each number must be between –180 and 180, inclusive. VM700T> get 6.00 6.00 VM700T> set VM700T> get 6.00 6.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual BSPU A 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 6.00 BSPU A 6 6 4.5 3 3 4.5 6 6 BSPU A 4.50 3.00 3.00 4.50 6.00 6.00 6.00 A–15 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “C” Group: Configuration File “C” keywords report on or set the values of Configuration File parameters. These keywords can only be used on VM700T’s equipped with Option 11 (PAL standard). Get commands used with the “C” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with the “C” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> where <argument> is the text to which the setting associated with the keyword is to be set. Table A–3: “C” keywords: Configuration File (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description CHAF Auto Limits File CHSN Source Name CHMF Measure Limits File CHSS Sync Source CHML Measurements Location File COCP Component option config file for PAL CHPT Printout Title COER Echo & Rounding option config file for PAL CHSM Selected Measurements File COTT Teletext option config file for PAL CHAF CHAF specifies the Auto Limits File for PAL operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Auto_Limit~Files/PAL. VM700T> get CHAF A System~Default VM700T> set CHAF A My_Auto_Limits VM700T> get CHAF A My_Auto_Limits VM700T> CHMF CHMF specifies the Measure Limits File for PAL operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measure_Limit~Files/PAL. VM700T> get CHMF A System~Default VM700T> set CHMF A My_Meas_Limits VM700T> get CHMF A My_Meas_Limits VM700T> A–16 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords CHML CHML specifies the Measurements Location File for PAL operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/PAL. VM700T> get CHML A System~Default VM700T> set CHML A My_Meas_Locs VM700T> get CHML A My_Meas_Locs VM700T> CHPT CHPT specifies the title that appears on printouts generated by the VM700T. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 50 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character. VM700T> VM700T> VM700T> VM700T> Yahoo! VM700T> CHSM get CHPT A Video Measurement Set set CHPT A Yahoo! get CHPT A CHSM specifies the Selected Measurements File for Auto Mode PALstandard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Selected~Measurements/PAL. VM700T> get CHSM A System~Default VM700T> set CHSM A My_Sel_Meas VM700T> get CHSM A My_Sel_Meas VM700T> CHSN CHSN specifies the source name for PAL-standard operation. This name is printed across the top of printouts generated by Auto mode or by pressing the Copy button. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 32 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character. VM700T> get CHSN A System Default VM700T> set CHSN A Our_Transmitter VM700T> get CHSN A Our_Transmitter VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–17 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords CHSS CHSS specifies the synchronization source for PAL-standard operation. This value can be set to one of the following strings (case-sensitive): Channel A, Channel B, Channel C, External, or Locked to Source. VM700T> get CHSS A Locked to Source VM700T> set CHSS A Channel A VM700T> get CHSS A Locked to Source VM700T> COCP COCP specifies the configuration file for the Component option in PAL-standard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Component/PAL. This keyword is only valid for PAL-standard VM700T’s with Option 30 (Component) installed. VM700T> get COCP A System Default VM700T> set COCP A My_Comp_File VM700T> get COCP A My_Comp_File VM700T> COER COER specifies the configuration file for the Echo & Rounding option in PAL-standard operation. This file is found in directory / nvram0/ConfigFiles/Echo_Rounding/PAL. This keyword is only valid for PAL-standard VM700T’s with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding) installed. VM700T> get COER A System Default VM700T> set COER A My_ER_File VM700T> get COER A My_ER_File VM700T> COTT COTT specifies the configuration file for the Teletext option in PALstandard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Teletext/PAL. This keyword is only valid for PAL-standard VM700T’s with Option 20 (Teletext) installed. VM700T> get COTT A System Default VM700T> set COTT A My_TT_File VM700T> get COTT A My_TT_File VM700T> A–18 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “D” Group: Configuration File “D” keywords report on or set the values of Configuration File parameters. These keywords can only be used on VM700T’s equipped with Option 01 (NTSC standard). Get commands used with the “D” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with the “D” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> where <argument> is the text to which the setting associated with the keyword is to be set. Table A–4: “D” keywords: Configuration File (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description DHAF Auto Limits File DHSN Source Name DHMF Measure Limits File DHSS Sync Source DHML Measurements Location File DOCP Component option config file for NTSC DHPT Printout Title DOER Echo & Rounding option config file for NTSC DHSM Selected Measurements File DOTT Teletext option config file for NTSC DHAF DHAF specifies the Auto Limits File for NTSC operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Auto_Limit~Files/NTSC. VM700T> get DHAF A System~Default VM700T> set DHAF A My_Auto_Limits VM700T> get DHAF A My_Auto_Limits VM700T> DHMF DHMF specifies the Measure Limits File for NTSC operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measure_Limit~Files/ NTSC. VM700T> get DHMF A System~Default VM700T> set DHMF A My_Meas_Limits VM700T> get DHMF A My_Meas_Limits VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–19 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords DHML DHML specifies the Measurements Location File for NTSC operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/NTSC. VM700T> get DHML A System~Default VM700T> set DHML A My_Meas_Locs VM700T> get DHML A My_Meas_Locs VM700T> DHPT DHPT specifies the title that appears on printouts generated by the VM700T. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 50 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character. VM700T> VM700T> VM700T> VM700T> Yahoo! VM700T> DHSM get DHPT A Video Measurement Set set DHPT A Yahoo! get DHPT A DHSM specifies the Selected Measurements File for Auto Mode NTSC-standard operation. This file is found in directory / nvram0/ConfigFiles/Selected~Measurements/NTSC. VM700T> get DHSM A System~Default VM700T> set DHSM A My_Sel_Meas VM700T> get DHSM A My_Sel_Meas VM700T> DHSN DHSN specifies the source name for NTSC-standard operation. This name is printed across the top of printouts generated by Auto mode or by pressing the Copy button. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 32 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character. VM700T> get DHSN A System Default VM700T> set DHSN A Our_Transmitter VM700T> get DHSN A Our_Transmitter VM700T> A–20 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords DHSS DHSS specifies the synchronization source for NTSC-standard operation. This value can be set to one of the following strings (case-sensitive): Channel A, Channel B, Channel C, External, or Locked to Source. VM700T> get DHSS A Locked to Source VM700T> set DHSS A Channel A VM700T> get DHSS A Locked to Source VM700T> DOCP DOCP specifies the configuration file for the Component option in NTSC-standard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Component/NTSC. This keyword is only valid for NTSC-standard VM700T’s with Option 30 (Component) installed. VM700T> get DOCP A System Default VM700T> set DOCP A My_Comp_File VM700T> get DOCP A My_Comp_File VM700T> DOER DOER specifies the configuration file for the Echo & Rounding option in NTSC-standard operation. This file is found in directory / nvram0/ConfigFiles/Echo_Rounding/NTSC. This keyword is only valid for NTSC-standard VM700T’s with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding) installed. VM700T> get DOER A System Default VM700T> set DOER A My_ER_File VM700T> get DOER A My_ER_File VM700T> DOTT DOTT specifies the configuration file for the Teletext option in NTSCstandard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Teletext/NTSC. This keyword is only valid for NTSC-standard VM700T’s with Option 20 (Teletext) installed. VM700T> get DOTT A System Default VM700T> set DOTT A My_TT_File VM700T> get DOTT A My_TT_File VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–21 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “E” Group: Component Configuration (NTSC) “E” keywords report on or set the values of Component Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard VM700T equipped with Option 30 (Component). Get commands used with the “E” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “E” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “E” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–5: “E” keywords: Component Configuration (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description EBC1 Pb CB color #1 (mV) ELCP Lightning color pk-pk ampl error (%) EBC2 Pb CB color #2 (mV) ELPW Lightning pk-white ampl error (%) EBC3 Pb CB color #3 (mV) EMKL Marker field and line EBC4 Pb CB color #4 (mV) EPRI Probe Input EBC5 Pb CB color #5 (mV) ERC1 Pr CB color #1 (mV) EBC6 Pb CB color #6 (mV) ERC2 Pr CB color #2 (mV) EBC7 Pb CB color #7 (mV) ERC3 Pr CB color #3 (mV) EBC8 Pb CB color #8 (mV) ERC4 Pr CB color #4 (mV) EBHA Pb K-Factor Pulse HAD ERC5 Pr CB color #5 (mV) EBKB Pb K-PB Factor (%) ERC6 Pr CB color #6 (mV) EBKF Pb K Factor (%) ERC7 Pr CB color #7 (mV) EBM1 Pb MB Packet #1 (dB) ERC8 Pr CB color #8 (mV) EBM2 Pb MB Packet #2 (dB) ERCI Stored Reference Channel Independent EBM3 Pb MB Packet #3 (dB) ERHA Pr K-Factor Pulse HAD EBM4 Pb MB Packet #4 (dB) ERKB Pr K-PB Factor (%) EBM5 Pb MB Packet #5 (dB) ERKF Pr K Factor (%) EBM6 Pb MB Packet #6 (dB) ERM1 Pr MB Packet #1 (dB) EBM7 Pb MB Packet #7 (dB) ERM2 Pr MB Packet #2 (dB) EBM8 Pb MB Packet #8 (dB) ERM3 Pr MB Packet #3 (dB) EBM9 Pb MB Packet #9 (dB) ERM4 Pr MB Packet #4 (dB) EBMB Pb Multiburst Packets ERM5 Pr MB Packet #5 (dB) EBMF Pb Multiburst flag (mV) ERM6 Pr MB Packet #6 (dB) EBNL Pb Non-Linearity (%) ERM7 Pr MB Packet #7 (dB) EBNO Pb Noise Level (dB rms) ERM8 Pr MB Packet #8 (dB) A–22 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–5: “E” keywords: Component Configuration (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description EBPP Pb P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values) ERM9 Pr MB Packet #9 (dB) EBRD Pb to Pr Delay (nsec) (3 values) ERMB Pr Multiburst Packets EBWL Bowtie field and line ERMF Pr Multiburst flag (mV) EBWT Bowtie interchannel delay (ns) ERNL Pr Non-Linearity (%) EBYD Pb to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values) ERNO Pr Noise Level (dB rms) ECSD Colorbar standard ERPP Pr P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values) ERYD Pr to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values) EYM2 Y MB Packet #2 (dB) ETNM T (nsec) EYM3 Y MB Packet #3 (dB) EYC1 Y CB color #1 (mV) EYM4 Y MB Packet #4 (dB) EYC2 Y CB color #2 (mV) EYM5 Y MB Packet #5 (dB) EYC3 Y CB color #3 (mV) EYM6 Y MB Packet #6 (dB) EYC4 Y CB color #4 (mV) EYM7 Y MB Packet #7 (dB) EYC5 Y CB color #5 (mV) EYM8 Y MB Packet #8 (dB) EYC6 Y CB color #6 (mV) EYM9 Y MB Packet #9 (dB) EYC7 Y CB color #7 (mV) EYMB Y Multiburst Packets EYC8 Y CB color #8 (mV) EYMF Y Multiburst flag (mV) EYHA Y K-Factor Pulse HAD EYNL Y Non-Linearity (%) EYKB Y K-PB Factor (%) EYNO Y Noise Level (dB rms) EYKF Y K Factor (%) EYPA Y Peak Amplitude (mV) (3 values) EYM1 Y MB Packet #1 (dB) EYSA Y Sync Amplitude (mV) (3 values) EBC1 – EBC8 Keywords EBC1 through EBC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits for Pb CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black. VM700T> get EBC1 A -50.00 50.00 VM700T> EBHA EBHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pb(B) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive. VM700T> get EBHA A 7 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–23 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords EBKB EBKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb K-PB factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get EBKB A -5.00 1.00 VM700T> EBKF EBKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb Kfactor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive. VM700T> get EBKF A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> EBM1 – Keywords EBM1 through EBM9 return or set the lower and upper EBM9 alarm limits, in dB, for Pb(B) packets 1 through 9 in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get EBM1 A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> EBMB EBMB returns or sets the number of Pb (B) multiburst packets. Legal values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive. VM700T> get EBMB A 5 VM700T> EBMF EBMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the Pb (B) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get EBMF A 300.00 700.00 VM700T> EBNL EBNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pb (B) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get EBNL A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> A–24 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords EBNO EBNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pb (B) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive. VM700T> get EBNO A --- -45.00 VM700T> EBPP EBPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pb (B) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get EBPP A 665.00 735.00 700.00 VM700T> EBRD EBRD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pb (B) to Pr (R) Delay, in nsec, in the Component Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from –400 to 400, inclusive. VM700T> get EBRD A -10.00 10.00 0.00 VM700T> EBWL EBWL specifies the field and line used for Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the field number and line number, respectively. VM700T> get EBWL A 1 45 VM700T> set EBWL A 1 50 VM700T> get EBWL A 1 50 VM700T> EBWT EBWT specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of interchannel delay (in ns) for Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –100 to +100, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get EBWT A -10.00 10.00 VM700T> set EBWT A -5 5 VM700T> get EBWT A -5.00 5.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–25 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords EBYD EBYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pb (B) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from –400 to 400, inclusive. VM700T> get EBYD A -50.00 50.00 0.00 VM700T> ECSD ECSD returns or sets the ColorBar standard used for the Component ColorBar application. Legal values are: GBR 700, GBR 700 Setup, GBR 714, GBR 714 Setup, YPbPr SMPTE/EBU, YPbPr 714 Betacam Setup, YPbPr 714 Betacam, and YPbPr 700 MII Setup. VM700T> get ECSD A YPbPr SMPTE/EBU VM700T> ELCP ELCP specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of color peak-to-peak amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get ELCP A -2.00 2.00 VM700T> set ELCP A -5 5 VM700T> get ELCP A -5.00 5.00 VM700T> ELPW ELPW specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of peak-to-white amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get ELPW A -2.00 2.00 VM700T> set ELPW A -5 5 VM700T> get ELPW A -5.00 5.00 VM700T> A–26 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords EMKL EMKL specifies the field and line location of the marker used in Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the field number and line number, respectively. VM700T> get EMKL A 1 164 VM700T> get EMKL A 1 140 VM700T> get EMKL A 1 140 VM700T> EPRI EPRI tells the VM700T whether or not to use special calibration factors for a probe input. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” tells the VM700T to use the special calibration factors; “no” uses the standard factors. NOTE. The EPRI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the component applications. VM700T> get EPRI A no VM700T> ERC1 – ERC8 Keywords ERC1 through ERC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits for Pr CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black. VM700T> get ERC1 A -50.00 50.00 VM700T> ERCI ERCI tells the VM700T whether or not stored reference values are shared by all channels for each standard, or are stored independently from channel to channel. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” means reference values are stored independently of each other; “no” means reference values are shared by all channels for each standard. NOTE. The ERCI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the component applications. VM700T> get ERCI A no VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–27 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords ERHA ERHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pr(R) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive. VM700T> get ERHA A 7 VM700T> ERKB ERKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-PB factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get ERKB A -5.00 1.00 VM700T> ERKF ERKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive. VM700T> get ERKF A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> ERM1 – Keywords ERM1 through ERM9 return or set the lower and upper ERM9 alarm limits, in dB, for Pr (R) packets 1 through 9 in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get ERM1 A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> ERMB ERMB returns or sets the number of Pr (R) multiburst packets. Legal values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive. VM700T> get ERMB A 5 VM700T> ERMF ERMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the Pr (R) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get ERMF A 300.00 700.00 VM700T> A–28 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords ERNL ERNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pr (R) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get ERNL A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> ERNO ERNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pr (R) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive. VM700T> get ERNO A --- -45.00 VM700T> ERPP ERPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pr (R) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get ERPP A 665.00 735.00 700.00 VM700T> ERYD ERYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pr (R) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from –400 to 400, inclusive. VM700T> get ERYD A -50.00 50.00 0.00 VM700T> ETNM ETNM returns or sets the T duration, in nsec. Legal values are integers from 50 to 150, inclusive. VM700T> get ETNM A 125 VM700T> EYC1 – EYC8 Keywords EYC1 through EYC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits for Y CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black. VM700T> get EYC1 A -50.00 50.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–29 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords EYHA EYHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Y(G) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive. VM700T> get EYHA A 2 VM700T> EYKB EYKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-PB factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get EYKB A -5.00 1.00 VM700T> EYKF EYKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive. VM700T> get EYKF A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> EYM1 – EYM9 Keywords EYM1 through EYM9 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits, in dB, for Y (G) packets 1 through 9 in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get EYM1 A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> EYMB EYMB returns or sets the number of Y (G) multiburst packets. Legal values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive. VM700T> get EYMB A 6 VM700T> EYMF EYMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the Y (G) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get EYMF A 300.00 700.00 VM700T> A–30 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords EYNL EYNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Y (G) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get EYNL A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> EYNO EYNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Y (G) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive. VM700T> get EYNO A --- -45.00 VM700T> EYPA EYPA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Y (G) Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get EYPA A 678.60 750.00 714.30 VM700T> EYSA EYSA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Y (G) Sync Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get EYSA A 271.40 300.00 285.70 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–31 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “F” Group: Component Configuration (PAL) “F” keywords report on or set the values of Component Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T equipped with Option 30 (Component). Get commands used with the “F” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “F” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “F” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–6: “F” keywords: Component Configuration (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description FBC1 Pb CB color #1 (mV) FLCP Lightning color pk-pk ampl error (%) FBC2 Pb CB color #2 (mV) FLPW Lightning pk-white ampl error (%) FBC3 Pb CB color #3 (mV) FMKL Marker line FBC4 Pb CB color #4 (mV) FPRI Probe Input FBC5 Pb CB color #5 (mV) FRC1 Pr CB color #1 (mV) FBC6 Pb CB color #6 (mV) FRC2 Pr CB color #2 (mV) FBC7 Pb CB color #7 (mV) FRC3 Pr CB color #3 (mV) FBC8 Pb CB color #8 (mV) FRC4 Pr CB color #4 (mV) FBHA Pb K-Factor Pulse HAD FRC5 Pr CB color #5 (mV) FBKB Pb K-PB Factor (%) FRC6 Pr CB color #6 (mV) FBKF Pb K Factor (%) FRC7 Pr CB color #7 (mV) FBM1 Pb MB Packet #1 (dB) FRC8 Pr CB color #8 (mV) FBM2 Pb MB Packet #2 (dB) FRCI Stored Reference Channel Independent FBM3 Pb MB Packet #3 (dB) FRHA Pr K-Factor Pulse HAD FBM4 Pb MB Packet #4 (dB) FRKB Pr K-PB Factor (%) FBM5 Pb MB Packet #5 (dB) FRKF Pr K Factor (%) FBM6 Pb MB Packet #6 (dB) FRM1 Pr MB Packet #1 (dB) FBM7 Pb MB Packet #7 (dB) FRM2 Pr MB Packet #2 (dB) FBM8 Pb MB Packet #8 (dB) FRM3 Pr MB Packet #3 (dB) FBM9 Pb MB Packet #9 (dB) FRM4 Pr MB Packet #4 (dB) FBMB Pb Multiburst Packets FRM5 Pr MB Packet #5 (dB) FBMF Pb Multiburst Flag (mV) FRM6 Pr MB Packet #6 (dB) FBNL Pb Non-Linearity (%) FRM7 Pr MB Packet #7 (dB) FBNO Pb Noise Level (dB rms) FRM8 Pr MB Packet #8 (dB) A–32 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–6: “F” keywords: Component Configuration (PAL) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description FBPP Pb P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values) FRM9 Pr MB Packet #9 (dB) FBRD Pb to Pr Delay (nsec) (3 values) FRMB Pr Multiburst Packets FBWL Bowtie line FRMF Pr Multiburst Flag (mV) FBWT Bowtie interchannel delay (ns) FRNL Pr Non-Linearity (%) FBYD Pb to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values) FRNO Pr Noise Level (dB rms) FCSD Colourbar standard FRPP Pr P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values) FRYD Pr to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values) FYM2 Y MB Packet #2 (dB) FTNM T (nsec) FYM3 Y MB Packet #3 (dB) FYC1 Y CB color #1 (mV) FYM4 Y MB Packet #4 (dB) FYC2 Y CB color #2 (mV) FYM5 Y MB Packet #5 (dB) FYC3 Y CB color #3 (mV) FYM6 Y MB Packet #6 (dB) FYC4 Y CB color #4 (mV) FYM7 Y MB Packet #7 (dB) FYC5 Y CB color #5 (mV) FYM8 Y MB Packet #8 (dB) FYC6 Y CB color #6 (mV) FYM9 Y MB Packet #9 (dB) FYC7 Y CB color #7 (mV) FYMB Y Multiburst Packets FYC8 Y CB color #8 (mV) FYMF Y Multiburst Flag (mV) FYHA Y K-Factor Pulse HAD FYNL Y Non-Linearity (%) FYKB Y K-PB Factor (%) FYNO Y Noise Level (dB rms) FYKF Y K Factor (%) FYPA Y Peak Amplitude (mV) (3 values) FYM1 Y MB Packet #1 (dB) FYSA Y Sync Amplitude (mV) (3 values) FBC1 – FBC8 Keywords FBC1 through FBC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits for Pb CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black. VM700T> get FBC1 A -50.00 50.00 VM700T> FBHA FBHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pb(B) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive. VM700T> get FBHA A 7 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–33 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FBKB FBKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb K-PB factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get FBKB A -5.00 1.00 VM700T> FBKF FBKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb Kfactor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive. VM700T> get FBKF A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> FBM1 – FBM9 Keywords FBM1 through FBM9 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits, in dB, for Pb(B) packets 1 through 9 in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get FBM1 A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> FBMB FBMB returns or sets the number of Pb (B) multiburst packets. Legal values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive. VM700T> get FBMB A 5 VM700T> FBMF FBMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the Pb (B) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get FBMF A 300.00 700.00 VM700T> FBNL FBNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pb (B) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get FBNL A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> A–34 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FBNO FBNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pb (B) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive. VM700T> get FBNO A --- -45.00 VM700T> FBPP FBPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pb (B) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get FBPP A 665.00 735.00 700.00 VM700T> FBRD FBRD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pb (B) to Pr (R) Delay, in nsec, in the Component Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from –400 to 400, inclusive. VM700T> get FBRD A -10.00 10.00 0.00 VM700T> FBWL FBWL specifies the line used for Bowtie measurements. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter, representing the line number. VM700T> get FBWL A 45 VM700T> set FBWL A 50 VM700T> get FBWL A 50 VM700T> FBWT FBWT specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of interchannel delay (in ns) for Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –100 to +100, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get FBWT A -10.00 10.00 VM700T> set FBWT A -5 5 VM700T> get FBWT A -5.00 5.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–35 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FBYD FBYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pb (B) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from –400 to 400, inclusive. VM700T> get FBYD A -50.00 50.00 0.00 VM700T> FCSD FCSD returns or sets the ColorBar standard used for the Component ColorBar application. Legal values are: GBR 700, GBR 700 Setup, GBR 714, GBR 714 Setup, YPbPr SMPTE/EBU, YPbPr 714 Betacam Setup, YPbPr 714 Betacam, and YPbPr 700 MII Setup. VM700T> get FCSD A YPbPr SMPTE/EBU VM700T> FLCP FLCP specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of color peak-to-peak amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get FLCP A -2.00 2.00 VM700T> set FLCP A -5 5 VM700T> get FLCP A -5.00 5.00 VM700T> FLPW FLPW specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of peak-to-white amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get FLPW A -2.00 2.00 VM700T> set FLPW A -5 5 VM700T> get FLPW A -5.00 5.00 VM700T> A–36 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FMKL FMKL specifies the line location of the marker used in Bowtie measurements. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter, representing the line number. VM700T> get FMKL A 164 VM700T> get FMKL A 140 VM700T> get FMKL A 140 VM700T> FPRI FPRI tells the VM700T whether or not to use special calibration factors for a probe input. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” tells the VM700T to use the special calibration factors; “no” uses the standard factors. NOTE. The FPRI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the component applications. VM700T> get FPRI A no VM700T> FRC1 – FRC8 Keywords FRC1 through FRC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits for Pr CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black. VM700T> get FRC1 A -50.00 50.00 VM700T> FRCI FRCI tells the VM700T whether or not stored reference values are shared by all channels for each standard, or are stored independently from channel to channel. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” means reference values are stored independently of each other; “no” means reference values are shared by all channels for each standard. NOTE. The FRCI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the component applications. VM700T> get FRCI A no VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–37 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FRHA FRHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pr(R) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive. VM700T> get FRHA A 7 VM700T> FRKB FRKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-PB factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get FRKB A -5.00 1.00 VM700T> FRKF FRKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive. VM700T> get FRKF A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> FRM1 – FRM9 Keywords FRM1 through FRM9 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits, in dB, for Pr (R) packets 1 through 9 in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get FRM1 A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> FRMB FRMB returns or sets the number of Pr (R) multiburst packets. Legal values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive. VM700T> get FRMB A 5 VM700T> FRMF FRMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the Pr (R) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get FRMF A 300.00 700.00 VM700T> A–38 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FRNL FRNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pr (R) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get FRNL A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> FRNO FRNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pr (R) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive. VM700T> get FRNO A --- -45.00 VM700T> FRPP FRPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pr (R) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get FRPP A 665.00 735.00 700.00 VM700T> FRYD FRYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Pr (R) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from –400 to 400, inclusive. VM700T> get FRYD A -50.00 50.00 0.00 VM700T> FTNM FTNM returns or sets the T duration, in nsec. Legal values are integers from 50 to 150, inclusive. VM700T> get FTNM A 125 VM700T> FYC1 – FYC8 Keywords FYC1 through FYC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits for Y CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black. VM700T> get FYC1 A -50.00 50.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–39 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FYHA FYHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Y(G) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive. VM700T> get FYHA A 2 VM700T> FYKB FYKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-PB factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get FYKB A -5.00 1.00 VM700T> FYKF FYKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive. VM700T> get FYKF A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> FYM1 – FYM9 Keywords FYM1 through FYM9 return or set the lower and upper alarm limits, in dB, for Y (G) packets 1 through 9 in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get FYM1 A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> FYMB FYMB returns or sets the number of Y (G) multiburst packets. Legal values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive. VM700T> get FYMB A 6 VM700T> FYMF FYMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the Y (G) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get FYMF A 300.00 700.00 VM700T> A–40 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords FYNL FYNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Y (G) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive. VM700T> get FYNL A 0.00 5.00 VM700T> FYNO FYNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Y (G) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive. VM700T> get FYNO A --- -45.00 VM700T> FYPA FYPA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Y (G) Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get FYPA A 678.60 750.00 714.30 VM700T> FYSA FYSA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow setting for the Y (G) Sync Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to 2000, inclusive. VM700T> get FYSA A 271.40 300.00 285.70 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–41 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “G” Group: Remote Configuration “G” keywords report on or set the values of parameters that control the way the VM700T communicates with a PC or remote terminal. commands used with the “G” keywords have the following form: commands used with “G” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each command used with “G” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–7: “G” keywords: Remote Configuration ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range Meaning or units GACC Clamp Coupling, Source A 0-3 0 = DC, 1 = AC, 2 = FAST, 3 = SLOW GACL Clamp Level, Source A –128 - 127 mV GACP Clamp Position, Source A GACW Clamp Width, Source A 0-3 0 = 0.5, 1 = 0.67, 2 = 1.0, 3 = 2.0 s GAFA Frame Algorithm, Source A 0-2 0 = normal synchronous frame pulse, 1 = block field mode (for VTRs), 2 = synthesized frame pulse, arbitrary phase GALM Lock Mode, Source A 0-3 0 = TV line lock (phase locked to video), 1 = phase locked to crystal, 2 = external strobe, 3 = 20.25 MHz strobe GASS Sound-In-Sync, Source A 0, 1 0 = Off, 1 = On GBCC Clamp Coupling, Source B 0-3 0 = DC, 1 = AC, 2 = FAST, 3 = SLOW GBCL Clamp Level, Source B –128 – 127 mV GBCP Clamp Position, Source B GBCW Clamp Width, Source B 0-3 0 = 0.5, 1 = 0.67, 2 = 1.0, 3 = 2.0 s GBFA Frame Algorithm, Source B 0-2 see GAFA (above) GBLM Lock Mode, Source B 0-3 see GALM (above) GBSS Sound-In-Sync, Source B 0, 1 0 = Off, 1 = On GCCC Clamp Coupling, Source C 0-3 0 = DC, 1 = AC, 2 = FAST, 3 = SLOW GCCL Clamp Level, Source C –128 - 127 mV GCCP Clamp Position, Source C GCCW Clamp Width, Source C 0-3 0 = 0.5, 1 = 0.67, 2 = 1.0, 3 = 2.0 s GCFA Frame Algorithm, Source C 0-2 see GAFA (above) GCLM Lock Mode, Source C 0-3 see GALM (above) GCSS Sound-In-Sync, Source C 0, 1 0 = Off, 1 = On A–42 s s s VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–7: “G” keywords: Remote Configuration (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range Meaning or units GLN6 System Line Number 1 - 625 current line number GSNC Sync 0-3 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = External GSRC Source 0-7 0 = Source A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = A - B, 4 = B - C, 5 = A -C, 6 = -A, 7= -B. GSSR Locked to Source 0, 1 0 = Off; 1 = On GSYI Sync Inverted 0, 1 0 = normal sync; 1 = inverted sync Table A–8: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote Configuration ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range Meaning or units GDSR Sets the digital active video source 0, 1 0 = A; 1 = B GMMO Sets major operation mode 0, 1 0 = Analog; 1 = Digital “G” Group Keyword Descriptions The following “G” Group: Remote Configuration keywords are available: GACC, GBCC, GCCC GACC, GBCC, and GCCC specify the clamp coupling mode for sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument, an integer from 0 to 3, inclusive. A setting of 0 indicates DC coupling (no clamping) is in effect. A setting of 1 indicates AC coupling is in effect. A setting of 2 indicates that fast clamp coupling is in effect. This removes DC offset, hum, and bounce from the signal. A setting of 3 indicates that slow clamp coupling is in effect. This still allows hum effects to be visible, but is useful in coping with large DC offsets on an input signal. VM700T> get GACC GACL, GBCL, GCCL GACL, GBCL, and GCCL specify the clamping level for sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument, representing the clamping level in milliVolts. VM700T> get GACL GACP, GBCP, GCCP GACP, GBCP, and GCCP specify the clamping position for sources A, B, and C, respectively.. The set command takes one argument, representing the clamping position in msec. VM700T> get GACP VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–43 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords GACW, GBCW, GCCW GACW, GBCW, and GCCW specify the clamp width for sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 0 to 3, inclusive. A value of 0 sets the clamp width to 0.5 msec. A value of 1 sets the clamp width to 0.67 msec. A value of 2 sets the clamp width to 1.0 msec. A value of 3 sets the clamp width to 2.0 msec. VM700T> get GACW GAFA, GBFA, GCFA GAFA, GBFA, and GCFA specify the frame algorithm used for sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 0 to 2, inclusive. A value of 0 sets the frame algorithm to a normal synchronous frame pulse. A value of 1 sets the frame algorithm to block field mode. A value of 2 sets the frame algorithm to an arbitrary-phase, synthesized frame pulse. VM700T> get GAFA GALM, GBLM, GCLM GALM, GBLM, and GCLM specify the lock mode for sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 0 to 3, inclusive. A value of 0 sets the lock mode to TV line lock (phase locked to video). A value of 1 sets the lock mode to “phaselocked to crystal.” A value of 2 sets the lock mode to external strobe. A value of 3 sets the lock mode to a 20.25-MHz strobe. VM700T> get GALM GASS, GBSS, GCSS GASS, GBSS, and GCSS turns Sound-in-Sync off or on for sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , 0 or 1. A value of 0 turns Sound-In-Sync off. A value of 1 turns Sound-InSync on. VM700T> get GASS GAST The GAST flag is similar to the GOOL flag, but it will be set TRUE if an Audio Auto Measurement starts (in other words, when it detects the first FSK preamble of the audio test sequence). So, a function can be played back at the same time as an Audio Measurement starts. The state of the GAST flag may be found by using the get GAST command, and it may be set using the set GAST command. The arguments are 0 and 1. The flag is useful for triggering the audio and the video measurements at the same time from a remote site, and when the video has to start a specific timing such as VTR playback testing. The GAST flag must be reset by the user to the state needed for the conditional testing. set GAST 0 ?GAST return delay 10 loop A–44 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords GLN5 GLN5 specifies the system line number for NTSC. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 1 to 525, representing the line number. Lines in field 1 are numbered from 1 to 263. Lines in field 2 are numbered from 264 to 525. VM700T> get GLN5 GLN6 GLN6 specifies the system line number for PAL. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 1 to 625, representing the line number. VM700T> get GLN6 GOOL GOOL specifies the value of the global out-of-limits flag. The set command takes one argument , 0 (false) or 1 (true). This parameter is set to 1 whenever a measurement application finds a value outside of its lower-to-upper limit range. The status of the global out-of-limits flag can be tested with the ?GOOL command. The global out-of-limits flag must be reset to 0 explicitly within a function; it does not return to 0 when tested. See the description of the ?GOOL command in Appendix A for an example showing the use of the GOOL keyword within a function. GRLY The ALARM connector on the rear panel of the VM700T (located between the two serial ports connectors) is not active. The internal relay that controls the contact closure is accessible through a set command. set GRLY 0 opens the relay and set GRLY 1 closes the relay. The set may be used in a Function Key in conjunction with the GOOL (global-out-of-limits) flag in a Function Key to turn on an alarm indicator. A second application for a program to monitor some condition for the out-of-limits to occur and use set GRLY 1 to close the relay for a period of time to sound an alarm, then open it again with set GRLY 0 to shut the alarm off. VM700T> get GSNC GSNC GSNC specifies the sync source. The set command takes one argument, an integer from 0 to 3, inclusive. Values of 0, 1, 2, and 3 set the sync source to A, B, C, and external, respectively. VM700T> get GSNC VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–45 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords GSRC GSRC specifies the signal source. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 0 to 7, inclusive. Values of 0, 1, and 2 set the signal source to A, B, or C, respectively. A value of 3 sets the signal source to A-B. A value of 4 sets the signal source to B-C. A value of 5 sets the signal source to A-C. A value of 6 sets the signal source to -A. A value of 7 sets the signal source to -B. VM700T> get GSRC GSSR GSSR turns Locked to Source off or on. The set command takes one argument, 0 or 1. A value of 0 turns Locked to Source off. A value of 1 turns Locked to Source on. VM700T> get GSSR GSYI GSYI controls sync inversion. The set command takes one argument, 0 or 1. A value of 0 sets sync to normal. A value of 1 inverts the sync. VM700T> get GSYI Option 1S “G” Group Keyword Descriptions The following “G” Group: Remote Configuration keywords are only available with Option 1S: GDSR GDSR sets the active channel (A or B) for the measured digital video source. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1. A value of 0 sets the digital active video source to Channel A. A value of 1 sets the digital active video source to Channel B. VM700T> get GDSR GMMO GMMO sets major operation mode of the VM700T measurement set to either Analog or Digital. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1. A value of 0 sets the operation mode to Analog. A value of 1 sets the operation mode to Digital. VM700T> get GMMO A–46 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “H” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC) “H” keywords report on or set the values of Echo/Rounding Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard VM700T equipped with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding). Get commands used with the “H” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> The form of each Set command used with “H” group keywords is documented below. Table A–9: “H” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range HROB NTSC Rounding of black (%) –50.00 to 50.00 HROW NTSC Rounding of white (%) –50.00 to 50.00 HROB HROB specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the Rounding of the Black measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50 and 50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get HROB A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> set HROB A undef 1 VM700T> get HROB A --- 1.00 VM700T> HROW HROW specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the Rounding of the White measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50 and 50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get HROW A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> set HROW A undef 1 VM700T> get HROW A --- 1.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–47 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “I” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL) “I” keywords report on or set the values of Echo/Rounding Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T equipped with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding). Get commands used with the “I” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> The form of each Set command used with “I” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–10: “I” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range IROB PAL Rounding of black (%) –50.00 to 50.00 IROW PAL Rounding of white (%) –50.00 to 50.00 IROB IROB specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the Rounding of the Black measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50 and 50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get IROB A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> set IROB A undef 1 VM700T> get IROB A --- 1.00 VM700T> IROW IROW specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the Rounding of the White measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50 and 50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get IROW A -1.00 1.00 VM700T> set IROW A undef 1 VM700T> get IROW A --- 1.00 VM700T> A–48 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “J” Group: Teletext Configuration (NTSC) “J” keywords report on or set the values of Teletext Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard VM700T equipped with Option 20 (Teletext). Get commands used with the “J” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “J” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “J” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–11: “J” keywords: Teletext Configuration (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description J0LV Level (mV) JPPM P-P Amplitude (mV) J1LV Level (mV) JPPP P-P Amplitude (%) JDES Data End to Sync (sec) JRIA Run In Amplitude (mV) JDLW Data Line Width (sec) JRIB Run In Bits (bits) JEHM Eye Height (mV) JRIS Run In Start (sec) JEHP Eye Height (%) JTTL Teletext field and line JEWP Eye Width (%) JTUN Timing Unit J0LV J0LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘0’ level in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –50 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> -18.00 VM700T> VM700T> -20.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual get J0LV A 18.00 set J0LV A -20 20 get J0LV A 20.00 A–49 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords J1LV J1LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘1’ level in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 482.00 VM700T> VM700T> 475.00 VM700T> JDES get J1LV A 518.00 set J1LV A 475 525 get J0LV A 525.00 JDES specifies the lower and upper limits for data-end-to-sync in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get JDES A 1.00 3.00 VM700T> set JDES A 0.5 5 VM700T> get JDES A 0.5 5.00 JDLW JDLW specifies the lower and upper limits for data line width in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get JDLW A 52.00 59.00 VM700T> set JDLW A 50 60 VM700T> get JDLW A 50.00 60.00 VM700T> A–50 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords JEHM JEHM specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 350.00 VM700T> VM700T> 300.00 VM700T> JEHP get JEHM A 500.00 set JEHM A 300 600 get JEHM A 600.00 JEHP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in percent for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get JEHP A 70.00 100.00 VM700T> set JEHP A 75 undef VM700T> get JEHP A 75.00 --VM700T> JEWP JEWP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye width in percent for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get JEWP A 70.00 100.00 VM700T> set JEWP A 75 undef VM700T> get JEWP A 75.00 --VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–51 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords JPPM JPPM specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 500.00 VM700T> VM700T> 550.00 VM700T> JPPP JPPP specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude in percent for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 100 to 200, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 100.00 VM700T> VM700T> 105.00 VM700T> JRIA get JPPP A 130.00 set JPPP A 105 150 get JPPP A 150.00 JRIA specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in amplitude in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 482.00 VM700T> VM700T> 480.00 VM700T> A–52 get JPPM A 650.00 set JPPM A 550 undef get JPPM A --- get JRIA A 518.00 set JRIA A 480 520 get JRIA A 520.00 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords JRIB JRIB specifies the lower and upper limits of the number of run-in bits for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 6 to 25, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get JRIB A 14.00 18.00 VM700T> set JRIB A 6 25 VM700T> get JRIB A 6.00 25.00 VM700T> JRIS JRIS specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in start time in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 7 to 15, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get JRIS A 9.00 11.00 VM700T> get JRIS A 8.5 12 VM700T> get JRIS A 8.50 12.00 VM700T> JTTL JTTL specifies the field and line location for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the field and line number, respectively. VM700T> get JTTL A 1 15 VM700T> set JTTL A 1 10 VM700T> get JTTL A 1 10 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–53 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords JTUN JTUN specifies the display timing unit for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter, indicating the current timing unit. Legal values are usec (for microseconds) and Tc (for “clock periods”, equal to 0.1746 msec). VM700T> get JTUN A usec VM700T> set JTUN A Tc VM700T> get JTUN A Tc VM700T> A–54 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “K” Group: Teletext Configuration (PAL) “K” keywords report on or set the values of Teletext Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T equipped with Option 20 (Teletext). Get commands used with the “K” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “K” group keywords, shown in Table A–12 take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “K” group keywords is documented following the table. Table A–12: “K” keywords: Teletext Configuration (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description K0LV Level (mV) KRIS Run In Start (sec) K1LV Level (mV) KS0L SIS ’0’ Level (mV) KDES Data End to Sync (sec) KS1L SIS ’1’ Level (mV) KDLW Data Line Width (sec) KS2L SIS ’2’ Level (mV) KDTM Data Timing (sec) KS3L SIS ’3’ Level (mV) KEHM Eye Height (mV) KSHM SIS Eye Height (mV) KEHP Eye Height (%) KSHP SIS Eye Height (%) KEWP Eye Width (%) KSPM SIS P-P Amplitude (mV) KPPM P-P Amplitude (mV) KSPP SIS P-P Amplitude (%) KPPP P-P Amplitude (%) KSWP SIS Eye Width (%) KRIA Run In Amplitude (mV) KTTL Teletext line KRIB Run In Bits (bits) K0LV K0LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘0’ level in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –50 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> -18.00 VM700T> VM700T> -20.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual get K0LV A 18.00 set K0LV A -20 20 get K0LV A 20.00 A–55 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords K1LV K1LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘1’ level in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 482.00 VM700T> VM700T> 475.00 VM700T> KDES get K1LV A 518.00 set K1LV A 475 525 get K1LV A 525.00 KDES specifies the lower and upper limits for data-end-to-sync in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KDES A 1.00 3.00 VM700T> set KDES A 0.5 5 VM700T> get KDES A 0.5 5.00 KDLW KDLW specifies the lower and upper limits for data line width in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KDLW A 52.00 59.00 VM700T> set KDLW A 50 60 VM700T> get KDLW A 50.00 60.00 VM700T> A–56 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KDTM KDTM specifies the lower and upper limits for data timing in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 10 to 15, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KDTM A 11.00 13.00 VM700T> set KDTM A 10 15 VM700T> get KDTM A 10.00 15.00 VM700T> KEHM KEHM specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 350.00 VM700T> VM700T> 300.00 VM700T> KEHP get KEHM A 500.00 set KEHM A 300 600 get KEHM A 600.00 KEHP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in percent for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KEHP A 70.00 100.00 VM700T> set KEHP A 75 undef VM700T> get KEHP A 75.00 --VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–57 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KEWP KEWP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye width in percent for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KEWP A 70.00 100.00 VM700T> set KEWP A 75 undef VM700T> get KEWP A 75.00 --VM700T> KPPM KPPM specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 500.00 VM700T> VM700T> 550.00 VM700T> KPPP KPPP specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude in percent for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 100 to 200, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 100.00 VM700T> VM700T> 105.00 VM700T> A–58 get KPPM A 650.00 set KPPM A 550 undef get KPPM A --- get KPPP A 130.00 set KPPP A 105 150 get KPPP A 150.00 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KRIA KRIA specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in amplitude in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 482.00 VM700T> VM700T> 480.00 VM700T> KRIB get KRIA A 518.00 set KRIA A 480 520 get KRIA A 520.00 KRIB specifies the lower and upper limits of the number of run-in bits for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 6 to 25, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KRIB A 14.00 18.00 VM700T> set KRIB A 6 25 VM700T> get KRIB A 6.00 25.00 VM700T> KRIS KRIS specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in start time in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 7 to 15, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KRIS A 9.00 11.00 VM700T> get KRIS A 8.5 12 VM700T> get KRIS A 8.50 12.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–59 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KS0L KS0L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘0’ level in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> -330.00 VM700T> VM700T> -350.00 VM700T> KS1L KS1L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘1’ level in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> -97.00 VM700T> VM700T> -100.00 VM700T> KS2L get KS1L A -37.00 set KS1L A -100 -30 get KS1L A -30.00 KS2L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘2’ level in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 137.00 VM700T> VM700T> 130.00 VM700T> A–60 get KS0L A -270.00 set KS0L A -350 -250 get KS0L A -250.00 get KS2L A 197.00 set KS2L A 130 200 get KS2L A 200.00 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KS3L KS3L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘3’ level in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 370.00 VM700T> VM700T> 350.00 VM700T> KSHM KSHM specifies the lower and upper limits of eye height in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 163.00 VM700T> VM700T> 160.00 VM700T> KSHP get KS3L A 430.00 set KS3L A 350 450 get KS3L A 450.00 get KSHM A 233.00 set KSHM A 160 240 get KSHM A 240.00 KSHP specifies the lower and upper limits of eye height in percent for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KSHP A 70.00 100.00 VM700T> set KSHP A 75 undef VM700T> get KSHP A 75.00 undef VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–61 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KSPM KSPM specifies the lower and upper limits of peak-to-peak amplitude in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 700.00 VM700T> VM700T> 650.00 VM700T> KSPP KSPP specifies the lower and upper limits of peak-to-peak amplitude in percent for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 100 to 200, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> 100.00 VM700T> VM700T> 110.00 VM700T> KSWP get KSPM A 910.00 set KSPM A 650 950 get KSPM A 950.00 get KSPP A 130.00 set KSPP A 110 undef get KSPP A undef KSWP specifies the lower and upper limits of eye width in percent for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0 to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set. VM700T> get KSWP A 70.00 100.00 VM700T> set KSWP A 75 undef VM700T> get KSWP A 75.00 undef VM700T> A–62 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords KTTL KTTL specifies the line location for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter, indicating the line number. VM700T> get KTTL A 17 VM700T> set KTTL A 16 VM700T> get KTTL A 16 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–63 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “L” Group: Measurement Locations (PAL) “L” keywords report on or set the measurement locations for Measure Mode measurements on a PAL-standard VM700T. Get commands used with the “L” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with the “L” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> Table A–13 lists the legal and default values for the Set command used with each “L” group keyword. Table A–13: “L” keywords: Measurement Locations (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal values Default L2TC 2T Sine-Squared Pulse (B1) center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 26.0 L2TL 2T Sine-Squared Pulse (B1) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 17 LBAL Luminance bar line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 17 LBAR Black Level Reference (b1) sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 36.0 LBAS Luminance bar start location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 12.0 LBAW Luminance bar width (B2) sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 10.0 LCBL Color Bar Line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 100 LLBR Luminance Bar Reference (b2) sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 17.0 LLSL 5-Riser Luminance Staircase (D1) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 17 LLSS 5-Riser Luminance Staircase (D1) start location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 40.0 LMBL Multiburst line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 18 LMC1 3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) packet 1 center sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 16.0 LMC2 3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) packet 2 center sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 20.0 LMC3 3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) packet 3 center sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 25.0 LMCL 3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 331 LMFS Multiburst flag start sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 12.0 LMFW Multiburst flag width sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 8.0 LMMS Measure Mode Sampling --- asynchronous, synchronous asynchronous LMP1 Multiburst packet #1 center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 14.5 A–64 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–13: “L” keywords: Measurement Locations (PAL) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal values Default LMP2 Multiburst packet #2 center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 20.5 LMP3 Multiburst packet #3 center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 26.5 LMP4 Multiburst packet #4 center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 32.5 LMP5 Multiburst packet #5 center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 38.5 LMP6 Multiburst packet #6 center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 44.5 LMPR 3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) reference sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 30.0 LMRE Modulated Bar (G1) chroma end sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 28.0 LMRL Modulated Bar (G1) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 331 LMRR Modulated Bar Lum-Reference (b6) sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 30.0 LMRS Modulated Bar (G1) chroma start sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 14.0 LMSL 5-Riser Modulated Staircase (D2) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 330 LMSS 5-Riser Modulated Staircase (D2) start location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 40.0 LMUC Modulated Pulse (F) center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 32.0 LMUH Modulated Pulse (F) HAD multiples of 100ns 20T, 10T 20T LMUL Modulated Pulse (F) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 17 LQLL Quiet line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 22 LSCA 5-Riser Chroma Amplitude % of bar amplitude 40%, 20% 40% LSID Source ID line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 16 LSIL Source ID start sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 26.0 LSIS SIS present --- yes, no no LSXX Sin X/X Line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 100 LTBL T Bar Start (SD) line line integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 17 LTBS T Bar Start (SD) location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 12.0 LTBW T Bar Width (SD) sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 10.0 LZCC Zero Carrier Pulse center location sec number, 0 to 64 (inclusive) 35.0 LZCL Zero Carrier Pulse line sec integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive) 13 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–65 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “M” Group: Measurement Locations (NTSC) “M” keywords report on or set the measurement locations for Measure Mode measurements on an NTSC-standard VM700T. All Get and Set commands used with the “M” keywords are channel-specific. Get commands used with the “M” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with the “M” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> [<argument>] Set commands used with “M” group keywords have either one or two arguments, depending on the keyword. Table A–14 lists the legal and default values for the Set command used with each “M” group keyword. Table A–14: “M” keywords: Measurement Locations (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal Values Default MAMU Amplitude units IRE or volts IRE, volts IRE MBNC Bounce Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 30 MCBF Color Bars Field 1, 2 2 MCBL Color Bars Line 10 to 262 17 MCBT ColorBar Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 2 17 MCFT Chroma Freq Resp Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 15 MCIF VIRS Field 1, 2 1 MCIL VIRS Line 10 to 262 19 MCLG ChromLum GainDelay Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MCNT Chrominance NonLinearity Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 17 MCVF Composite VITS Field 1, 2 1 MCVL Composite VITS Line 10 to 262 18 MDGT DGDP Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MEGD GroupDelay SinX_X Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 2 18 MFGR Fix 0 IRE to --- Back Porch, 0 volts Back Porch MHTL H Timing Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 100 MIRR IRE bar reference --- yes, no no MKFL K Factor Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MLNT Luminance NonLinearity Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MMBF Multiburst Field 1, 2 1 MMBL Multiburst Line 10 to 262 17 A–66 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–14: “M” keywords: Measurement Locations (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal Values Default MMBT MultiBurst Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MNLF Noise Line (Quiet) Field 1, 2 1 MNLL Noise Line (Quiet) Line 10 to 262 12 MNSL Noise Spectrum Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 12 MNVF NTC-7 Combination Field 1, 2 1 MNVL NTC-7 Combination Line 10 to 262 17 MPBT Bar LineTime Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MSAM Sampling --- synchronous, asynchronous asynchronous MTBL T Bar (SD) Field and Line 1,2 / 10 to 262 1 18 MZCA Zero Carrier Pulse Ref --- yes, no no MZCC Zero Carrier Pulse Center Location (sec) 0 to 64 25.5 MZCF Zero Carrier Pulse Field 1, 2 1 MZCL Zero Carrier Pulse Line 10 to 262 16 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–67 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “N” Group: Video Wander Configuration (NTSC) “N” keywords report on or set the values of the Drift Rate and Frequency Offset application configuration parameters on an NTSC-standard VM700T. All Get and Set commands used with the “N” keywords are channel-specific. Get commands used with the “N” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with the “N” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> [<argument>] Set commands used with “N” group keywords have either one or two arguments, depending on the keyword. Table A–15 lists the legal and default values for the Set command used with each “N” group keyword. Table A–15: “N” keywords: Video Wander Limits (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal values Default NDRT Drift-rate limits ppb/s –999.0 to 999.0 –28.0 to 28.0 NFRO Frequency-offset limits ppb –99990.0 to 99990.0 –2800.0 to 2800.0 A–68 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “O” Group: Video Wander Configuration (PAL) “O” keywords report on or set the values of the Drift Rate and Frequency Offset application configuration parameters on an PAL-standard VM700T. All Get and Set commands used with the “O” keywords are channel-specific. Get commands used with the “O” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with the “O” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> [<argument>] Set commands used with “O” group keywords have either one or two arguments, depending on the keyword. Table A–16 lists the legal and default values for the Set command used with each “O” group keyword. Table A–16: “O” keywords: Video Wander Limits (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal values Default ODRT Drift-rate limits ppb/s –999.0 to 999.0 –22.6 to 22.6 OFRO Frequency-offset limits ppb –9999.0 to 9999.0 –226.0 to 226.0 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–69 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “P” Group: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) “P” keywords report on or set the limits for Auto Mode measurements on a PAL-standard VM700T. Get commands used with the “P” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channel letter> Set commands used with the “P” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2> <arg3> <arg4> where <arg1> is the lower caution limit, <arg2> is the upper caution limit, <arg3> is the lower alarm limit, and <arg4> is the upper alarm limit. Table A–17 lists the legal ranges and default values for the Set command used with each “P” group keyword. Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default P2CW S/N.2 Chr-wgtd dB 0 to 999.9 52.0, - - -, 42.0, - - - P2LW S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (567) dB 0 to 999.9 58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - - P2U9 S/N.2 Un-wgtd (569) dB 0 to 999.9 58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - - P2UN S/N.2 Un-wgtd (567) dB 0 to 999.9 60.0, - - -, 50.0, - - - P2W9 S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (569) dB 0 to 999.9 58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - - PAPL Ave. Picture Level % 0 to 150 --- PBAA Luminance Bar Amp mv 0 to 999.9 650,750,600,800 PBAC Luminance Bar Amp % Carr 0 to 999.9 60,68,55,73 PBAE Burst Ampl Error % –50 to 50 –3, 3 –10, 10 PBAM Bar Ampl Error % –50 to 50 –5, 5 –10, 10 PBAT Residual Carrier % Carr 0 to 100 10, 12.5, 7.5, 15 PBAV Burst Amplitude mV 0 to 999.9 285, 315, 270, 330 PBDF Peak Differential Gain % –50 to 50 - - -, 10, - - -, 20 PBLD Baseline Distortion % Bar –50 to 50 –1, 1, –2, 2 PBLL Blanking Level % Carr 0 to 100 72, 76, 69, 79 PBPS Broad Pulse Sep sec 0 to 20 4.5, 4.9, 4.4, 5.0 PBQD Burst Quadrature Error deg –90 to 90 –2, 2, –5, 5 PBRT Bar Rise Time nsec 0 to 999.9 180, 220, 160, 240 PBTE Bar Tilt (Rec 569) % Bar –40 to 40 –5, 5, –10, 10 PCBC Burst Duration Cycles 0 to 100 9, 11, 7.5, 12.5 PCBD Burst Duration sec 0 to 20 2, 2.5, 1.7, 2.8 A–70 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default PCEP number of consecutive errors before printing --- integer, 1 to 3 2 PCGP Chr/Lum Gn (Mod Bar) % Bar –90 to 90 –10, 10, –20, 20 PCHW S/N Chr-wgtd dB 0 to 999.9 52, - - -, 42, - - - PCLD Chr/Lum Delay Ineq % –500 to 500 –40, 40, –50, 50 PCLI Chr/Lum Intermod % Bar –50 to 50 –5, 5, –10, 10 PCRA Chrom Ref Ampl Err % –50 to 50 –3, 3, –10, 10 PDGD Pk-Pk Diff Gain % 0 to 100 - - -, 10, - - -, 20 PDPD Pk-Pk Diff Phase Deg 0 to 100 - - -, 10, - - -, 20 PEPD Equalizing Pulse sec 0 to 20 2.34, 2.36, 2.3, 2.4 PFPD Front Porch sec 0 to 20 1.2, 1.8, 0.5, 3.0 PFTD Field Time Distortion % –50 to 50 –1.0, 1.0, –2.0, 2.0 PGNP Chr/Lum Gn (Mod Pls) % Bar –90 to 90 –10, 10, –20, 20 PICP ICPM (Absolute) deg –50 to 50 –10, 10, –20, 20 PICR ICPM (Rel Blanking) deg –50 to 50 –10, 10, –20, 20 PLBI Line Blanking sec 0 to 20 11.7, 12.3, 9.1, 16.0 PLF1 10–1000 Hz LF Error % Bar 0 to 50 0.0, 2.0, 0.0, 5.0 PLF5 50–550 Hz LF Error % Bar 0 to 50 0.0, 2.0, 0.0, 5.0 PLFC CCIR LF Error % Bar 0 to 50 0.0, 2.0, 0.0, 5.0 PLND Lum Nonlin Dist % 0 to 50 - - -, 5.0, - - -, 10.0 PLSD Sync Duration sec 0 to 20 4.6, 4.8, 4.5, 4.9 PLTD Line Time Distortion % Bar 0 to 40 0.0, 5.0, 0.0, 10.0 PLW9 S/N Lum-wgtd (569) dB 0 to 999.9 58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - - PMB1 MB Packet #1 % Flag 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PMB2 MB Packet #2 % Flag 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PMB3 MB Packet #3 % Flag 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PMB4 MB Packet #4 % Flag 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PMB5 MB Packet #5 % Flag 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PMB6 MB Packet #6 % Flag 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PMBB Multiburst Flag % Bar 0 to 999.9 55, 65, 50, 70 PMBM Multiburst Flag mV 0 to 999.9 385, 455, 350, 490 PPBR Pulse/Bar Ratio Err % Bar –90 to 90 –10, 10, –20, 20 PPDG Peak Diff Gain % –50 to 50 - - -, 10, - - -, 20 PPDP Peak Diff Phase Deg –50 to 50 - - -, 10, - - -, 20 PSAV Sync Amplitude mV 0 to 999.9 285, 315, 270, 330 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–71 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default PSBR Sync/Bar Ratio % 0 to 999.9 90, 110, 80, 120 PSBT Sync to Bar Top mV 0 to 2000 935, 1065, 870, 1130 PSCH SCH Phase deg –90 to 90 –10, 10, –15, 15 PSFT Sync Fall Time nsec 0 to 999.9 170, 300, 140, 330 PSNP S/N Periodic dB 0 to 999.9 45.0, - - -, 40.0, - - - PSNU S/N Unweighted (567) dB 0 to 999.9 60.0, - - -, 50.0, - - - PSNW S/N Lum-weighted (567) dB 0 to 999.9 58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - - PSRT Sync Rise Time nsec 0 to 999.9 170, 300, 140, 330 PSTB Sync-to-Burst Start sec 0 to 20 5.5, 5.7, 5.4, 5.8 PSYA Sync Amplitude Error % –50 to 100 –5, 5, –10, 10 PTTK 2T Pulse K-factor % Kf 0 to 40 0, 1, 0, 4 PUN9 S/N Unweighted (569) dB 0 to 999.9 60.0, - - -, 50.0, - - - A–72 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “R” Group: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) “R” keywords report on or set the limits for Auto Mode measurements on an NTSC-standard VM700T. Get commands used with the “R” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channel letter> Set commands used with the “R” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2> <arg3> <arg4> where <arg1> is the lower caution limit, <arg2> is the upper caution limit, <arg3> is the lower alarm limit, and <arg4> is the upper alarm limit. The RFCB keyword is the only exception to these rules in the “R” group. get RFCB followed by a channel letter returns eighteen sets of limits, divided into three groups: amplitude error in percent for yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, and blue; phase error in degrees for yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, and blue; and chrominance/luminance ratio error in percent for yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, and blue. set RFCB is followed by a channel letter and 72 values (separated by spaces or tabs), specifying lower and upper caution limits and lower and upper alarm limits for each measurement listed in the previous paragraph. Table A–18 lists the legal ranges and default values for each “R” group keyword used with the Set command. Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default R2LW S/N.2 NTC7 Unwgtd dB 0 to 100.0 - - -, - - -, 67.0, - - - R2PR 2T Pulse K-Factor % Kf 0 to 25 -.-.-, -.-.-, 0, 2.5 R2SU S/N.2 Unif. Unwgtd dB 0 to 100.0 - - -, - - -, 67.0, - - - R2SW S/N.2 Unif. Lum-wgtd dB 0 to 100.0 - - -, - - -, 67.0, - - - R2UW S/N.2 NTC7 Lum-wgtd dB 0 to 100.0 - - -, - - -, 67.0, - - - RAPL Average Picture Level % 0 to 150 -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.- RBAA Bar Amplitude IRE 50 to 150 -.-.-, -.-.-, 96, 104 RBAP Burst Amplitude % sync 50 to 200 -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.- RBAT Bar Top % carr 0 to 50 10, 15 10 15 RBLL Blanking Level % carr 50 to 100 74, 76, 72.5, 77.5 RBVI Blanking Variation % Bar/IRE 0 to 40 -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.- RBVP Blanking Variation % carr 0 to 25 -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.- RBWC (FCC) Burst Width cycles 5 to 20 -.-.-, -.-.-, 8, 11 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–73 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default RBZU (FCC) Breezeway sec 0 to 5 0.28, - - -, 0.4, - - - RCEP number of consecutive error(s) before printing --- 1 to 3 2 RCGP Chroma-Lum Gain % 50 to 200 95, 105, 93, 107 RCLD Chroma-Lum Delay nsec –200 to 200 –45, 45, –60, 60 RDGD Differential Gain % 0 to 25 0, 7, 0, 10 RDPD Differential Phase deg 0 to 50 0, 2.2, 0, 3 REEE IEEE–511 ST Dist % SD 0 to 25 0, 2, 0, 3 REWP (FCC) Equalizer Width % S.W. 20 to 80 46, 54, 45, 55 RFCB FCC Color Bars Measurement (18 sets of results) % (6 sets) Deg (6 sets) %(6 sets) –50 to 100 –15, 15, –20, 20 (6 sets) –7.5, 7.5, –10, 10 (6 sets) –15, 15, –20, 20 (6 sets) RFM1 FCC MB Packet #1 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 57.1, 63 RFM2 FCC MB Packet #2 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 56.2, 64.2 RFM3 FCC MB Packet #3 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 54.8, 65.6 RFM4 FCC MB Packet #4 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 53.5, 67.3 RFM5 FCC MB Packet #5 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 56, 64.3 RFM6 FCC MB Packet #6 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, - - -, - - - RFMI FCC Multiburst Flag % Bar/IRE 50 to 150 92.5, 107.5, 90, 110 RFMP FCC Multiburst Flag % carr 0 to 50 10.6, 14.4, 10, 15 RFPU (FCC) Front Porch sec 0 to 5 1.4, - - -, 1.3, - - - RFTD Field Time Distortion –20 to 20 - - -, - - -, –3, 3 RHB4 (FCC) H Blank 4 IRE sec 5 to 20 10.85, 11.35, 10.5, 11.5 RICP ICPM deg –50 to 50 –2, 2, –3, 3 RLND Lum NL Dist DY % 0 to 25 0, 7, 0, 10 RLTD Line Time Dist % 0 to 25 0, 1.4, 0, 2 RN2C NTC7 20 IRE Chroma IRE 0 to 50 - - -, - - -, 15, 25 RN8C NTC7 80 IRE Chroma IRE 40 to 120 - - -, - - -, 75, 85 RNCI NTC7 Chr-Lum Intmd IRE –50 to 50 - - -, - - -, –4, 4 RNCP NTC7 Chr NL Phase deg 0 to 25 - - -, - - -, 0, 5 RNM1 NTC7 MB Packet #1 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 47.6, 52.5 RNM2 NTC7 MB Packet #2 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 46.8, 53.5 RNM3 NTC7 MB Packet #3 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 45.7, 54.7 RNM4 NTC7 MB Packet #4 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 44.6, 56.1 RNM5 NTC7 MB Packet #5 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 46.7, 53.6 A–74 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default RNM6 NTC7 MB Packet #6 % flag 20 to 100 - - -, - - -, 43.6, 57.4 RNMI NTC7 Multiburst Flag % Bar/IRE 50 to 150 92.5, 107.5, 90, 110 RNMP NTC7 Multiburst Flag % carr 0 to 50 10.6, 14.4, 10,15 RPBR Pulse/Bar Ratio % 50 to 200 95.5, 104.5, 94, 106 RRBG Rel Burst Gain % –50 to 100 –15, 15, –20, 20 RRBP Rel Burst Phase deg –50 to 50 –7.5, 7.5, –10, 10 RRBW RS–170A Burst Width cycles 5 to 20 -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.- RREU RS–170A Equalizer sec 0 to 5 2.21, 2.39, 2.18, 2.42 RRFP RS–170A Front Porch sec 0 to 5 1.41, 1.59, 1.38, 1.62 RRHB RS–170A H Blanking sec 5 to 20 10.71, 11.09, 10.65, 11.15 RRSS RS–170A Sync-Setup sec 5 to 20 9.31, 9.49, 9.28, 9.52 RRSU RS–170A Serration sec 2 to 10 4.61, 4.79, 4.58, 4.82 RRSW RS–170A Sync Width sec 2 to 10 4.61, 4.79, 4.58, 4.82 RSBE (FCC) Sync-to-Burst-End sec 5 to 20 5, 7.8, 5, 7.9 RSBS Sync-to-Burst Start sec 0 to 25 5.21, 5.39, 5.18, 5.42 RSCH SCH Phase deg –90 to 90 –45, 45, - - -, - - - RSFN (FCC) Sync Fall Time nsec 0 to 999.9 0, 190, 0, 250 RSNP S/N Periodic dB 0 to 100 - - -, - - -, 57, - - - RSNU S/N Unified Unweighted dB 0 to 100 - - -, - - -, 57, - - - RSNW S/N Unified Lum-Weighted dB 0 to 100 - - -, - - -, 54, - - - RSRN (FCC) Sync Rise Time nsec 0 to 999.9 0, 190, 0, 250 RSSU (FCC) Sync-to-Setup sec 5 to 20 9.4, - - -, 9.2, - - - RSVI Sync Variation % Bar/IRE 0 to 40 -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.- RSVP Sync Variation % carr 0 to 25 -.-.-, -.-.-, 0, 5 RSWU (FCC) Serration Width sec 2 to 10 3.98, 4.92, 3.8, 5.1 RSYA Sync Amplitude % Bar/IRE 20 to 80 37, 43, 36, 44 RSYU (FCC) Sync Width sec 2 to 10 4.5, 5, 4.4, 5.1 RULW S/N NTC7 Lum-Weighted dB 0 to 100 - - -, - - -, 54, - - - RUUW S/N NTC7 Unweighted dB 0 to 100 - - -, - - -, 57, - - - RVAI Burst Amplitude % Bar/IRE 20 to 80 37, 43, 36, 44 RVB2 V Blank 20 IRE F1 lines 15 to 30 20.1, 20.9, 19.9, 21.1 RVB3 V Blank 20 IRE F2 lines 15 to 30 20.1, 20.9, 19.9, 21.1 RVB4 (FCC) V Blank 4 IRE F1 lines 15 to 30 18.5, 20.5, 18, 21 RVB5 (FCC) V Blank 4 IRE F2 lines 15 to 30 18.5, 20.5, 18, 21 RVCB VIRS Chroma Ampl % burst 50 to 200 95, 105, 90, 110 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–75 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default RVCI VIRS Chroma Ampl % Bar/IRE 20 to 80 38, 42, 36, 44 RVCP VIRS Chroma Phase deg –50 to 50 –5, 5, –10, 10 RVLR VIRS Luminance Ref % Bar/IRE 20 to 80 47.5, 52.5, 45, 55 RVSU VIRS Setup % Bar/IRE 0 to 25 5.7, 9.3, 5, 10 “S” Group: Communication Setup “S” keywords report on or set the values of VM700T communication parameters. commands used with the “S” keywords have the following form: commands used with “S” group keywords shown in Table A–19 take different arguments, depending on the keyword. Some “S” group keywords are “read-only” (they cannot be used with the set command). The form of each command used with “S” group keywords is documented following the table. Table A–19: “S” keywords: Communication Setup ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description SMSD Remote Control Message Display SP1P Port 1 Parity SP0A Port 0 Protocol SP1R Port 1 Reset Character SP0B Port 0 Baud Rate SPCF Copy Format SP0C Port 0 Character Size SPCO Control Port SP0D Port 0 Carrier Detect SPCP Copy Port SP0F Port 0 Flow Control SPLF Log Format SP0P Port 0 Parity SPLP Log Port SP0R Port 0 Reset Character SPRC Remote Control Port SP1A Port 1 Protocol SPRF Report Format SP1B Port 1 Baud Rate SPRO Remote Control Prompt SP1C Port 1 Character Size SPRP Report Port SP1D Port 1 Carrier Detect SRIM Non SLIP Interfacing Mode SP1F Port 1 Flow Control A–76 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords SMSD SMSD specifies or reports on the destination for messages from the VM700T. SMSD is channel-independent. SMSD takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Remote or VM700T Screen. VM700T> Remote VM700T> VM700T> VM700T> VM700T> SP0A get SMSD set SMSD VM700T> Screen get SMSD Screen SP0A returns the communications protocol for port 0. SP0A is readonly (cannot be used with the set command). SP0A takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None or SLIP. VM700T> get SP0A SLIP VM700T> SP0B SP0B returns the baud rate for port 0. SP0B is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0B takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. VM700T> get SP0B 9600 VM700T> SP0C SP0C returns the character size (number of bits per character) for port 0. SP0C is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0C takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are 7 or 8. VM700T> get SP0C 8 VM700T> SP0D SP0D returns the status of carrier detect for port 0. SP0D is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0D takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are disabled or enabled. VM700T> get SP0D disabled VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–77 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords SP0F SP0F returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP0F is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0F takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, or None. VM700T> get SP0F CTS/RTS VM700T> SP0P SP0P returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP0P is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0P takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Odd, Even, Zero, or One. VM700T> get SP0P None VM700T> SP0R SP0R returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP0R is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0R takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Ctrl–A, Ctrl–B, Ctrl–C, Ctrl–D, Ctrl–E, Ctrl–F, Ctrl–G, Ctrl–H, Ctrl–I, Ctrl–J, Ctrl–K, Ctrl–L, Ctrl–M, Ctrl–N, Ctrl–O, Ctrl–P, Ctrl–Q, Ctrl–R, Ctrl–S, Ctrl–T, Ctrl–U, Ctrl–V, Ctrl–W, Ctrl–X, Ctrl–Y, or Ctrl–Z. VM700T> get SP0R None VM700T> SP1A SP1A returns the communications protocol for port 0. SP1A is readonly (cannot be used with the set command). SP1A takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None or SLIP. VM700T> get SP1A SLIP VM700T> SP1B SP1B returns the baud rate for port 0. SP1B is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1B takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. VM700T> get SP1B 9600 VM700T> A–78 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords SP1C SP1C returns the character size (number of bits per character) for port 0. SP1C is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1C takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are 7 or 8. VM700T> get SP1C 8 VM700T> SP1D SP1D returns the status of carrier detect for port 0. SP1D is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1D takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are disabled or enabled. VM700T> get SP1D disabled VM700T> SP1F SP1F returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP1F is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1F takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, or None. VM700T> get SP1F CTS/RTS VM700T> SP1P SP1P returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP1P is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1P takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Odd, Even, Zero, or One. VM700T> get SP1P None VM700T> SP1R SP1R returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP1R is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1R takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Ctrl–A, Ctrl–B, Ctrl–C, Ctrl–D, Ctrl–E, Ctrl–F, Ctrl–G, Ctrl–H, Ctrl–I, Ctrl–J, Ctrl–K, Ctrl–L, Ctrl–M, Ctrl–N, Ctrl–O, Ctrl–P, Ctrl–Q, Ctrl–R, Ctrl–S, Ctrl–T, Ctrl–U, Ctrl–V, Ctrl–W, Ctrl–X, Ctrl–Y, or Ctrl–Z. VM700T> get SP1R None VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–79 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords SPCF SPCF returns or sets the copy format (this is the format used to format output when the Copy button is pressed). SPCF takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Epson LQ, PostScript, ASCII Printer, or HP LaserJet. VM700T> get SPCF None VM700T> set SPCF PostScript VM700T> get SPCF PostScript VM700T> SPCO SPCO returns the name of the VM700T control port. The VM700T uses the control port to send characters in response to a control command. SPCO is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SPCO takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. VM700T> get SPCO None VM700T> SPCP SPCP returns or sets the name of the VM700T copy port. SPCP takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. VM700T> get None VM700T> set VM700T> get Serial Port VM700T> SPLF SPCP SPCP Serial Port 0 SPCP 0 SPLF returns or sets the log format (this is the format in which data logging information is sent ). SPLF takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Epson LQ, PostScript, ASCII Printer, or HP LaserJet. VM700T> get SPLF None VM700T> set SPLF Epson LQ VM700T> get SPLF Epson LQ VM700T> A–80 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords SPLP SPLP returns or sets the name of the VM700T log port. SPLP takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. VM700T> get None VM700T> set VM700T> get Serial Port VM700T> SPRC SPLP Serial Port 0 SPLP 0 SPRC returns the name of the VM700T remote control port. SPRC is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SPRC takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. VM700T> get None VM700T> set VM700T> get Serial Port VM700T> SPRF SPLP SPRC SPRC Serial Port 0 SPRC 0 SPRF returns or sets the report format (this is the format used to format timed reports). SPRF takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Epson LQ, PostScript, ASCII Printer, or HP LaserJet. VM700T> get SPRF None VM700T> set SPRF Epson LQ VM700T> get SPRF Epson LQ VM700T> SPRO SPRO returns or sets the VM700T remote control prompt. SPRO takes a single argument after the keyword. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 32 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character. VM700T> set SPRO Archimedes> Archimedes> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–81 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords SPRP SPRP returns or sets the name of the VM700T report port (this is the port used to print timed reports). SPRP takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. VM700T> get None VM700T> set VM700T> get Serial Port VM700T> SRIM SPRP SPRP Serial Port 1 SPRP 1 SRIM returns the non-SLIP interfacing mode. SRIM is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SRIM takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Computer or Terminal. VM700T> get SRIM Terminal VM700T> “T” Group: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) “T” keywords report on or set the limits for Measure Mode measurements on a PAL-standard VM700T. Get commands used with the “T” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channel letter> Set commands used with the “T” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2> where <arg1> and <arg2> are the lower and upper limits. The TSX keywords are the only exceptions to these rules. Keywords TSX1 through TSX7 each specify the frequency at which the limits defined by TGN1 through TGN7 and TDL1 through TDL7 apply. Thus, the get command for any of the TSX keywords returns only one value, while the set command takes only one argument after the channel letter. Table A–20 lists the legal ranges and default values for each “T” group keyword used with the Set command. A–82 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default TAMN Chrominance AM Noise dB rms –100 to 0 ----- –40.0 TBFE Burst Freq Error Hz –360 to 360 –50.0 50.0 TBLV Burst Level mV 100 to 999.9 250.0 310.0 TBTE Bar Tilt (Rec 569) % Bar –40 to 40 –5.0 5.0 TBWD Burst Width sec 0 to 20 2.00 2.50 TCDL Chrom Delay nsec –400 to 400 –40.0 40.0 TCGN Chrom Gain % 10 to 200 90.0 110.0 TCLB Chrom Level Blue mV 0 to 999.9 423.0 517.0 TCLC Chrom Level Cyan mV 0 to 999.9 598.0 730.0 TCLG Chrom Level White mV 0 to 999.9 0.0 10.0 TCLI Chrom Lum Intermod % –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 TCLK Chrom Level Black mV –50 to 999.9 0.0 10.0 TCLM Chrom Level Magenta mV 0 to 999.9 558.0 682.0 TCLN Chrom Level Green mV 0 to 999.9 558.0 682.0 TCLR Chrom Level Red mV 0 to 999.9 598.0 730.0 TCLY Chrom Level Yellow mV 0 to 999.9 423.0 517.0 TCNL Chrom Non Lin % –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 TCPB Chrom Phase Blue deg 0 to 360 342.0 352.0 TCPC Chrom Phase Cyan deg 0 to 360 278.0 288.0 TCPM Chrom Phase Magenta deg 0 to 360 55.0 65.0 TCPN Chrom Phase Green deg 0 to 360 235.0 245.0 TCPR Chrom Phase Red deg 0 to 360 98.0 108.0 TCPY Chrom Phase Yellow deg 0 to 360 162.0 172.0 TDGN Diff Gain % –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 TDGP Diff Gain (p-p) % 0 to 50 0.0 10.0 TDL1 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –12.0 12.0 TDL2 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –12.0 12.0 TDL3 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –12.0 12.0 TDL4 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –12.0 12.0 TDL5 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –12.0 12.0 TDL6 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –12.0 12.0 TDL7 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –40.0 40.0 TDPH Diff Phase deg –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 TDPP Diff Phase (p-p) deg 0 to 50 0.0 10.0 TEFS H Blanking End from Sync sec 0 to 20 8.00 12.00 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–83 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default TEP5 Equalizer Pulse Width (50% sync) sec 0 to 20 2.10 2.80 TFES Falling Edge SD % 0 to 50 ----- 1.0 TFTM Fall Time nsec 0 to 360 90.0 105.0 TGN1 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 -0.5 0.5 TGN2 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 -0.5 0.5 TGN3 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 -0.5 0.5 TGN4 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 -0.5 0.5 TGN5 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 -0.5 0.5 TGN6 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 -0.5 0.5 TGN7 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 200 –1.0 0.5 THAD HAD nsec 50 to 999.9 150.0 250.0 THBW H Blanking Width sec 0 to 20 9.00 14.00 TICP ICPM deg –20 to 0 (argument 1) 0 to 20 (argument 2) –5.0 5.0 TJIF Peak-Peak Jitter in a Frame sec 0 to 999.9 0.0 100.0 TK2T K–2T %Kf 0 to 99.9 0.0 5.0 TKPB K-PB %Kf –50 to 50 –5.0 3.0 TLFE Line Freq Error % –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 TLLB Lum Level Blue mV 0 to 999.9 54.0 66.0 TLLC Lum Level Cyan mV 0 to 999.9 331.0 405.0 TLLG Lum Level Grey mV 0 to 999.9 630.0 770.0 TLLK Lum Level Black mV –50 to 999.9 –10.0 10.0 TLLM Lum Level Magenta mV 0 to 999.9 195.0 234.0 TLLN Lum Level Green mV 0 to 999.9 277.0 339.0 TLLR Lum Level Red mV 0 to 999.9 141.0 173.0 TLLY Lum Level Yellow mV 0 to 999.9 419.0 512.0 TLNL Lum Non Lin % 0 to 50 0.0 5.0 TLTJ Peak to Peak Long Time Jitter sec 0 to 40 0.0 5.0 TMB1 MB Packet 1 dB –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 TMB2 MB Packet 2 dB –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 TMB3 MB Packet 3 dB –40 to 40 –2.0 1.0 TMB4 MB Packet 4 dB –40 to 40 –3.0 1.0 TMB5 MB Packet 5 dB –40 to 40 –5.0 1.0 TMB6 MB Packet 6 dB –40 to 40 ----- 1.0 TMBF Multiburst Flag mV 0 to 999.9 400.0 750.0 A–84 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default TMBL Bar Level (Ref. B1) mV 500 to 999.9 650.0 750.0 TMBT Line Time Distortion % Bar 0 to 40 0.0 5.0 TMSL Sync Level mV 100 to 999.9 288.0 315.0 TMVL Bar Level (Ref. Back Porch) mV 500 to 999.9 650.0 750.0 TMVP Sync-to-Bar-Top mV 500 to 2000 950.0 1050.0 TNLV Noise Level dB rms –100 to 0 ----- –45.0 TPBR PB Ratio % 10 to 200 90.0 110.0 TPMN Chrominance PM Noise dB rms –100 to 0 ----- –40.0 TPNL Chrom Phase Non Lin deg –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 TRES Rising Edge SD % 0 to 50 ----- 1.0 TRTM Rise Time nsec 0 to 360 90.0 105.0 TSBR Sync/Bar Ratio % 0 to 999.9 90.0 110.0 TSBS Sync-Burst Start sec 4 to 9.9 5.50 5.70 TSCH SCH phase deg –360 to 360 –45.0 45.0 TSDC SD at Cursor % 0 to 50 ----- 1.0 TSFT Sync Fall Time nsec 10 to 999.9 100.0 300.0 TSK1 Head SW Skew (Field 1) sec –40 to 40 –5.0 5.0 TSK2 Head SW Skew (Field 2) sec –40 to 40 –5.0 5.0 TSP5 Serration Pulse Width (50% sync) sec 0 to 20 4.40 5.00 TSRT Sync Rise Time nsec 10 to 999.9 100.0 300.0 TSTS H Blanking Start-Sync sec –10 to 0 –5.0 -0.5 TSWD Sync Width sec 2 to 9.9 4.5 4.9 TSX1 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 0.50 TSX2 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 1.00 TSX3 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 2.00 TSX4 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 3.00 TSX5 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 4.00 TSX6 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 4.30 TSX7 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.1 to 5.8 4.80 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–85 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “U” Group: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) “U” keywords report on or set the limits for Measure Mode measurements on an NTSC-standard VM700T. Get commands used with the “U” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channel letter> Set commands used with the “U” keywords have the following form: set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2> where <arg1> and <arg2> are the lower and upper limits. The USX keywords are the only exceptions to these rules. Keywords USX1 through USX7 each specify the frequency at which the limits defined by UGN1 through UGN7 and UDL1 through UDL7 apply. Thus, the get command for any of the USX keywords returns only one value, while the set command takes only one argument after the channel letter. Table A–21 lists the legal ranges and default values for each “U” group keyword used with the Set command. Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default UAMN Chrominance AM Noise dB rms –100 to 0 ---- –40.0 UBFE Burst Freq Error Hz –360 to 360 –50.0 50.0 UBLV Burst Level mV 100 to 999.9 250.0 310.0 UBTE Bar Tilt (Rec 569) % Bar –40 to 40 –5.0 5.0 UBWD Burst Width cycles 0 to 20 8.50 9.50 UBZW Breezeway sec 0 to 20 0.30 0.80 UCDL Chrom Delay nsec –400 to 400 –40.0 40.0 UCF1 CF Packet 1 dB –40 to 40 –3.0 1.0 UCF2 CF Packet 2 dB –40 to 40 –2.0 1.0 UCF3 CF Packet 3 dB –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 UCF4 CF Packet 4 dB –40 to 40 –2.0 1.0 UCF5 CF Packet 5 dB –40 to 40 –3.0 1.0 UCFF Chroma Freq Resp Flag mV 0 to 999.9 600.0 800.0 UCGN Chrom Gain % 10 to 200 90.0 110.0 UCLB Chrom Level Blue mV 0 to 999.9 400.0 489.0 UCLC Chrom Level Cyan mV 0 to 999.9 567.0 693.0 UCLG Chrom Level Grey mV 0 to 999.9 0.0 10.0 A–86 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default UCLI Chrom Lum Intermod % –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 UCLK Chrom Level Black mV 0 to 999.9 0.0 10.0 UCLM Chrom Level Magenta mV 0 to 999.9 530.0 647.0 UCLN Chrom Level Green mV 0 to 999.9 530.0 647.0 UCLR Chrom Level Red mV 0 to 999.9 567.0 693.0 UCLY Chrom Level Yellow mV 0 to 999.9 400.0 489.0 UCNL Chrom Non Lin % –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 UCPB Chrom Phase Blue deg 0 to 360 342.0 352.0 UCPC Chrom Phase Cyan deg 0 to 360 278.0 288.0 UCPM Chrom Phase Magenta deg 0 to 360 55.0 65.0 UCPN Chrom Phase Green deg 0 to 360 235.0 245.0 UCPR Chrom Phase Red deg 0 to 360 98.0 108.0 UCPY Chrom Phase Yellow deg 0 to 360 162.0 172.0 UDGN Diff Gain % –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 UDGP Diff Gain (p-p) % 0 to 50 0.0 10.0 UDL1 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDL2 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDL3 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDL4 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDL5 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDL6 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDL7 Sin X/X Group Delay nsec –500 to 500 –15.0 15.0 UDPH Diff Phase deg –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 UDPP Diff Phase (p-p) deg 0 to 50 0.0 10.0 UEFS H Blanking End from Sync sec 0 to 20 8.00 12.00 UEP1 Equalizer Pulse Width (10% sync) sec 0 to 20 2.10 2.80 UEP5 Equalizer Pulse Width (50% sync) sec 0 to 20 2.10 2.80 UFES Falling Edge SD % 0 to 50 ----- 1.0 UFPR Front Porch sec 0 to 20 0.50 2.50 UFTM Fall Time nsec 0 to 360 120.0 130.0 UGN1 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 -0.5 0.5 UGN2 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 -0.5 0.5 UGN3 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 -0.5 0.5 UGN4 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 -0.5 0.5 UGN5 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 -0.5 0.5 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–87 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default UGN6 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 -0.5 0.5 UGN7 Sin X/X Gain dB –50 to 20 –6.0 0.5 UHAD HAD nsec 50 to 999 200.0 300.0 UHBW H Blanking Width sec 0 to 20 9.00 12.00 UICP ICPM deg –20 to 0 (argument 1) 0 to –20 (argument 2) –5.0 5.0 UJIF Peak-Peak Jitter in a Frame sec 0 to 999.9 0.0 100.0 UK2T K–2T %Kf 0 to 99.9 0.0 5.0 UKPB K-PB %Kf –50 to 50 –5.0 3.0 ULFE Line Freq Error % –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 ULLB Lum Level Blue mV 0 to 999.9 97.0 119.0 ULLC Lum Level Cyan mV 0 to 999.9 360.0 440.0 ULLG Lum Level Grey mV 0 to 999.9 494.0 786.0 ULLK Lum Level Black mV –50 to 999.9 48.0 59.0 ULLM Lum Level Magenta mV 0 to 999.9 231.0 282.0 ULLN Lum Level Green mV 0 to 999.9 311.0 380.0 ULLR Lum Level Red mV 0 to 999.9 182.0 222.0 ULLY Lum Level Yellow mV 0 to 999.9 445.0 544.0 ULNL Lum Non Lin % 0 to 50 0.0 5.0 ULTJ Peak to Peak Long Time Jitter sec 0 to 40 0.0 5.0 UMB1 MB Packet 1 dB –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 UMB2 MB Packet 2 dB –40 to 40 –1.0 1.0 UMB3 MB Packet 3 dB –40 to 40 –2.0 1.0 UMB4 MB Packet 4 dB –40 to 40 –3.0 1.0 UMB5 MB Packet 5 dB –40 to 40 –5.0 1.0 UMB6 MB Packet 6 dB –40 to 40 –10.0 1.0 UMBF Multiburst Flag mV 0 to 999.9 400.0 750.0 UMBL Bar Level mV 500 to 999.9 679.0 750.0 UMBT Line Time Distortion % Bar 0 to 40 0.0 5.0 UMSL Sync Level mV 100 to 999.9 271.0 300.0 UMVL Video Level mV 500 to 999.9 679.0 750.0 UMVP Video Pk-Pk mV 500 to 2000 950.0 1050.0 UNLV Noise Level dB rms –100 to 0 ----- –45.0 UPBR PB Ratio % 10 to 200 90.0 110.0 UPMN Chrominance PM Noise dB rms –100 to 0 ----- –40.0 A–88 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Units Legal range Default UPNL Chrom Phase Non Lin deg –50 to 50 –5.0 5.0 URES Rising Edge SD % 0 to 50 ----- 1.0 URTM Rise Time nsec 0 to 360 120.0 130.0 USBE Sync-Burst End sec 0 to 20 7.50 8.50 USBR Sync/Bar Ratio % 0 to 999.9 90.0 110.0 USBS Sync-Burst Start sec 4 to 9.9 5.30 5.32 USCH SCH phase deg –360 to 360 –40.0 40.0 USDC SD at Cursor % 0 to 50 ----- 1.0 USFT Sync Fall Time nsec 10 to 999.9 100.0 300.0 USK1 Head SW Skew Field 1 sec –40 to 40 –5.0 5.0 USK2 Head SW Skew Field 2 sec –40 to 40 –5.0 5.0 USP1 Serration Pulse Width (10% sync) sec 0 to 20 4.40 5.00 USP5 Serration Pulse Width (50% sync) sec 0 to 20 4.40 5.00 USRT Sync Rise Time nsec 10 to 999.9 100.0 300.0 USSU Sync to Setup sec 0 to 20 8.00 11.00 USTS H Blanking Start-Sync sec –10 to 0 –5.0 -0.5 USWD Sync Width sec 2 to 9.9 4.5 4.9 USX1 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 0.50 USX2 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 1.00 USX3 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 2.50 USX4 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 3.00 USX5 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 3.58 USX6 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 4.00 USX7 Sin X/X Freq MHz 0.15 to 5.8 4.18 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–89 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “V” Group: Video Source Selection “V” keywords report on or set the active video source selection files. Get commands used with the “V” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> Set commands used with the “V” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <fileĆname> Table A–22 lists the “V” group keywords and their meanings. Table A–22: “V” keywords: Video Source Selection ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description VNCA Source A NTSC Config File VSCC Source C PAL Config File VNCB Source B NTSC Config File VSTA Source A Video Standard VNCC Source C NTSC Config File VSTB Source B Video Standard VSCA Source A PAL Config File VSTC Source C Video Standard VSCB Source B PAL Config File VSTE Timed Events file VNCA VNCA returns or sets the NTSC Video_Source File for Source A. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video_Source~Files/ NTSC. VM700T> get VNCA NewMeas VM700T> VNCB VNCB returns or sets the NTSC Video_Source File for Source B. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video_Source~Files/ NTSC. VM700T> get VNCB System~Default VM700T> VNCC VNCC returns or sets the NTSC Video_Source File for Source C. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video_Source~Files/ NTSC. VM700T> get VNCC System~Default VM700T> A–90 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords VSCA VSCA returns or sets the PAL Video_Source File for Source A. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Video_Source~Files/PAL. VM700T> get VSCA NewMeas VM700T> VSCB VSCB returns or sets the PAL Video_Source File for Source B. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Video_Source~Files/PAL. VM700T> get VSCB System~Default VM700T> VSCC VSCC returns or sets the PAL Video_Source File for Source C. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/ Video_Source~Files/PAL. VM700T> get VSCC System~Default VM700T> VSTA VSTA returns or sets the video standard for Source A. Legal values are NTSC and PAL. VM700T> get VSTA NTSC VM700T> set VSTA PAL VM700T> get VSTA PAL VM700T> VSTB VSTA returns or sets the video standard for Source B. Legal values are NTSC and PAL. VM700T> get VSTB NTSC VM700T> set VSTB PAL VM700T> get VSTB PAL VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–91 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords VSTC VSTC returns or sets the video standard for Source C. Legal values are NTSC and PAL. VM700T> get VSTC NTSC VM700T> set VSTC PAL VM700T> get VSTC PAL VM700T> VSTE VSTE returns or sets the current Timed Events File. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Timed~Events. VM700T> get VSTE System~Default VM700T> set VSTE My_Events VM700T> get VSTE My_Events VM700T> “W” Group: Audio Source Selection “W” keywords report on or set the active video source selection files. Get commands used with the “W” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> Set commands used with the “W” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <fileĆname> Table A–23 lists the “W” group keywords and their meanings. Table A–23: “W” keywords: Audio Source Selection ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Keyword Description WACA Source A Audio Config File WACC Source C Audio Config File WACB Source B Audio Config File WACA WACA returns or sets the Audio_Source File for Source A. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Audio_Source~Files. VM700T> get WACA O.33:00TEST VM700T> A–92 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords WACB WACB returns or sets the Audio_Source File for Source B. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Audio_Source~Files. VM700T> get WACB O.33:00TEST VM700T> WACC WACC returns or sets the Audio_Source File for Source C. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Audio_Source~Files. VM700T> get WACC O.33:00TEST VM700T> “X” Group: Camera Testing (NTSC) “X” keywords report on or set the values of Camera Testing Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard VM700T equipped with Option 21 (Camera Testing). Get commands used with the “X” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “X” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “X” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–24 lists the “X” group keywords and their meanings. Table A–24: “X” keywords: Camera Testing (NTSC) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range XCOS Camera Output standard Composite Composite Setup GBR 700 (system default) GBR 700 Setup GBR 714 GBR 714 Setup YPbPr SMPTE/EBU YPbPr 714 Betacam Setup YPbPr 714 Betacam YPbPr 700 MII Setup XSWP Frequency Response Packets 6 to 12 XB6F Packets beyond 6 MHz –– From 1 to 12 XB6T Packets beyond 6 MHz –– To 1 to 12 XSWL Frequency Response field and line Fields 1 or 2 Lines 1 to 262 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–93 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–24: “X” keywords: Camera Testing (NTSC) (Cont.) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range XGDR Reference (mV) 0 to 999.9 mV XG01 to XG12 Y (G) Packet # 1 (dB) to Y (G) Packet #12 (dB) –40 to +40 dB XBDR Reference (mV) 0 to 999.9 mV XB01 to XB12 (B) Packet # 1 (dB) to (B) Packet #12 (dB) –40 to +40 dB XRDR Reference (mV) 0 to 999.9 mV XR01 to XR12 (R) Packet # 1 (dB) to (R) Packet #12 (dB) –40 to +40 dB XCOS XCOS returns or sets the camera output standard. Legal values for NTSC are: GBR 700, GBR 700 Setup, GBR 714, GBR 714 Setup, YPbPr SMPTE/EBU, YPbPr 714 Betacam Setup, YPbPr 714 Betacam, YPbPr 700 MII Setup. VM700T> get XCOS A GBR 714 VM700T> XSWP XSWP returns or sets the number of frequency response packets. Legal values are integers from 6 to 12, inclusive. VM700T> get XSWP A 12 VM700T> XB6F XB6F returns or sets the number of the first frequency response packet beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12, inclusive. VM700T> get XB6F A 4 VM700T> XB6T XB6T returns or sets returns or sets the number of the last frequency response packet beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12, inclusive. VM700T> get XB6T A 9 VM700T> A–94 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords XSWL XSWL returns or sets the frequency response field and line. XSWL takes two arguments, a field number and a line number. Legal values for the first argument are integers from 1 to 2, inclusive. Legal values for the second argument are integers from 1 to 262, inclusive. VM700T> get XSWL A 1 120 VM700T> XGDR XGDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference on the Y (green) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get XGDR A --- 700.00 VM700T> XG01 – XG12 Keywords XG01 through XG12 return or set the lower and upper limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the Y channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get XG01 A -1.00 0.00 VM700T> XBDR XBDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference on the B (blue) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get XBDR A --- 700.00 VM700T> XB01 – XB12 Keywords XB01 through XB12 return or set the lower and upper limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the B (blue) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get XB01 A -1.00 0.00 VM700T> XRDR XRDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference on the R (red) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get XRDR A --- 700.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–95 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords XR01 – XR12 Keywords XR01 through XR12 return or set the lower and upper limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the R (red) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get XR01 A -1.00 0.00 VM700T> “Y” Group: Camera Testing (PAL) “Y” keywords report on or set the values of Camera Testing Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T equipped with Option 21 (Camera Testing). Get commands used with the “Y” keywords have the following form: get <keyword> <channelĆletter> Set commands used with “Y” group keywords take different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “Y” group keywords is documented in the pages that follow. Table A–25 lists the “Y” group keywords and their meanings. Table A–25: “Y” keywords: Camera Testing (PAL) ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Keyword Description Range YCOS Camera Output standard Composite GBR YPbPr SMPTE/EBU YSWP Frequency Response Packets 6 to 12 YB6F Packets beyond 6 MHz –– From 1 to 12 YB6T Packets beyond 6 MHz –– To 1 to 12 YSWL Frequency Response line Lines 1 to 625 YGDR Reference (mV) 0 to 999.9 mV YG01 to YG12 Y (G) Packet # 1 (dB) to Y (G) Packet #12 (dB) –40 to +40 dB YBDR Reference (mV) 0 to 999.9 mV YB01 to YB12 (B) Packet # 1 (dB) to (B) Packet #12 (dB) –40 to +40 dB YRDR Reference (mV) 0 to 999.9 mV YR01 to YR12 (R) Packet # 1 (dB) to (R) Packet #12 (dB) –40 to +40 dB A–96 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords YCOS YCOS returns or sets the camera output standard. Legal values for PAL are: GBR and YPbPr SMPTE/EBU VM700T> get YCOS A GBR 714 VM700T> YSWP YSWP returns or sets the number of frequency response packets. Legal values are integers from 6 to 12, inclusive. VM700T> get YSWP A 12 VM700T> YB6F YB6F returns or sets the number of the first frequency response packet beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12, inclusive. VM700T> get YB6F A 4 VM700T> YB6T YB6T returns or sets returns or sets the number of the last frequency response packet beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12, inclusive. VM700T> get YB6T A 9 VM700T> YSWL YSWL returns or sets the frequency response line. YSWL takes one argument. Legal values are integers from 1 to 625, inclusive. VM700T> get YSWL A 1 120 VM700T> YGDR YGDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference on the Y (green) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get YGDR A --- 700.00 VM700T> VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–97 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords YG01 – YG12 Keywords YG01 through YG12 return or set the lower and upper limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the Y channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get YG01 A -1.00 0.00 VM700T> YBDR YBDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference on the B (blue) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get YBDR A --- 700.00 VM700T> YB01 – YB12 Keywords YB01 through YB12 return or set the lower and upper limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the B (blue) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get YB01 A -1.00 0.00 VM700T> YRDR YRDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference on the R (red) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive. VM700T> get YRDR A --- 700.00 VM700T> YR01 – YR12 Keywords YR01 through YR12 return or set the lower and upper limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the R (red) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive. VM700T> get YR01 A -1.00 0.00 VM700T> A–98 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Option 1S Get/Set Keywords This section covers the keywords available with Option 1S. NOTE. The remote commands and keywords are case sensitive. Option 1S introduces lower case keywords to the VM700T measurement set. Be sure to enter the commands and keywords exactly as they appear in this manual. “d” Group Keywords You can use the “d” group keywords to set the digital source selection parameters. Figure A–1 shows the relationship between the Source Selection Digital configuration file and the “d” group keywords. Table A–26 lists the “d” group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands. Source_Selection~Digital Digital Video Standard Digital A: Auto detect 143Mb 270Mb 270Mb 360Mb Video Source File NTSC: 525Ćline: 625Ćline: Unspec: Audio Limits: Digital B: dsta Auto detect 143Mb 270Mb 270Mb 360Mb NTSC: 525Ćline: 625Ćline: Unspec: Audio Limits: Remote Keywords System~Default System~Default System~Default System~Default d1na d25a d26a d3ua System~Default dada Video Source File dstb System~Default System~Default System~Default System~Default d1nb d25b d26b d3ub System~Default dadb SDI Output: Selected Channel dout Startup In: Digital Mode Hex Format: SMPTE dmod dhex Figure A–1: Source Selection Digital configuration file relationship to remote commands VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–99 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file Keyword Description and get/set command examples dsta dsta sets the video format of the signal the measurement set will assume is being input on the SDI Ch. A input. The Digital Source File set in the Source Selection Digital configuration file for that for video format will be used for measurements. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: Auto detect, 143Mb NTSC, 270Mb 525-line, 270Mb 625-line, and 360Mb Unspec (unspecified). If you have selected the Auto detect setting, the measurement set will determine the video format of the input signal. VM700T> get dsta 270Mb 525Ćline VM700T> set dsta Auto detect d1na d1na sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 143Mb NTSC video format on the SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/143Mb~NTSC/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d1na System~Default VM700T> set d1na Custom~File d25a d25a sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 525-line video format on the SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d25a System~Default VM700T> set d25a Custom~File d26a d26a sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 625-line video format on the SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~625-line/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d26a System~Default VM700T> set d26a Custom~File d3ua d3ua sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 360Mb Unspec video format on the SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/360Mb~Unspec/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d3ua System~Default VM700T> set d3ua Custom~File dada dada sets the name of the Digital Audio Setup file to be used for audio measurements on the SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Audio Setup file. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/Digital_Audio~Setup. VM700T> get dada System~Default VM700T> set dada Custom~File A–100 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples dstb dstb sets the video format of the signal the measurement set will assume is being input on the SDI Ch. B input. The Digital Source File set in the Source Selection Digital configuration file for that for video format will be used for measurements. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: Auto detect, 143Mb NTSC, 270Mb 525-line, 270Mb 625-line, and 360Mb Unspec (unspecified). If you have selected the Auto detect setting, the measurement set will determine the video format of the input signal. VM700T> get dstb 270Mb 525Ćline VM700T> set dstb Auto detect d1nb d1nb sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 143Mb NTSC video format on the SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/143Mb~NTSC/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d1nb System~Default VM700T> set d1nb Custom~File d25b d25b sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 525-line video format on the SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d25b System~Default VM700T> set d25b Custom~File d26b d26b sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 625-line video format on the SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~625-line/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d26b System~Default VM700T> set d26b Custom~File d3ub d3ub sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 360Mb Unspec video format on the SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/360Mb~Unspec/Digital_Source~Files. VM700T> get d3ub System~Default VM700T> set d3ub Custom~File dadb dadb sets the name of the Digital Audio Setup file to be used for audio measurements on the SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Audio Setup file. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/Digital_Audio~Setup. VM700T> get dadb System~Default VM700T> set dadb Custom~File VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–101 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples dout dout sets which one of the two SDI input signals will be output to the SDI Output connector. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: Channel A, Channel B, Selected Channel, and None. VM700T> get dout Channel A VM700T> set dout Channel B dmod This command is not used for remote programming. The command is included here for completeness. dmod sets the mode (Analog or Digital) the measurement set starts up in. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: Analog or Digital. VM700T> get dmod Analog VM700T> set dmod Digital dhex dhex sets the hex format (SMPTE or EBU) used to display hexadecimal numbers in the measurement displays. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: SMPTE or EBU. VM700T> get dhex SMPTE VM700T> set dhex EBU “w”, “m”,“r”, and “h” Group Keywords These four keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the parameters of the Digital Source File for the four video formats listed below: The “w” group is used for the 143Mb NTSC format. The “m” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format. The “r” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format. The “h” group is used for the 360Mb Unspec format. Figure A–2 shows the relationship between the Digital Source Files configuration file and the group keywords. Table A–27 lists the “m” group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands. The “w”, “r”, and “h” group keywords use the same last three characters in the keywords to perform the same function for the other three video formats. Replace the “m” character in the listed keywords with one of the “w”, “r”, and “h” group characters to set the parameters for the video format you want to edit. A–102 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords 270Mb~525Ćline/Digital_Source~Files/System~Default Digital Channel Configuration 270Mb 525ĆLine System Defaults File Eye Limits: Wander Limits: Format Setup: System~Default System~Default System~Default Source Name: Video Printout Title: System Default Video Measurement Set (Channel A only) (Channel A only) Remote Keywords -fel -fdl -ffs -prt Figure A–2: Digital Source Files configuration file relationship to remote commands Table A–27: “m” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Digital Source Files configuration file Keyword Description and get/set command examples mfel mfsl sets the name of the Eye Limits configuration file to be used for measurements by the 270 Mb 525-line video format on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Eye Limits configuration file. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Eye~Limits. VM700T> get mfsl A System~Default VM700T> set mfsl A Custom~File mfdl mfdl sets the name of the Wander Limits configuration file to be used for measurements by the 270 Mb 525-line video format on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Wander Limits configuration file. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Wander~Limits. VM700T> get mfdl A System~Default VM700T> set mfdl A Custom~File mffs mffs sets the name of the Format Setup configuration file to be used for measurements by the 270 Mb 525-line video format on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Format Setup configuration file. This file must be in the following directory path: nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Format~Setup. VM700T> get mffs A System~Default VM700T> set mffs A Custom~File VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–103 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–27: “m” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Digital Source Files configuration file (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples msrc msrc sets the Source Name for log report titles on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), System Default (name supplied with Option 1S), or a Source Name title of your choice. VM700T> get msrc A System Default VM700T> set msrc A Custom~Title mprt mprt sets the Video Printout Title for log reports on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), Video Measurement Set (name supplied with Option 1S), or a Video Printout Title of your choice. VM700T> get mprt A Video Measurement Set VM700T> set mprt A Custom Title “y”, “o”,“t”, and “j” Group Keywords These four keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the parameters of the Eye Limits file for the four video formats listed below: The “y” group is used for the 143Mb NTSC format. The “o” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format. The “t” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format. The “j” group is used for the 360Mb Unspec format. Figure A–3 shows the relationship between the Eye Limits configuration file and the group keywords. Table A–28 lists the “o” group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands. The “y”, “t”, and “j” group keywords use the same last three characters in the keywords to perform the same function for the other three video formats. Replace the “o” character in the listed keywords with one of the “y”, “t”, and “j” group characters to set the signal limits in the SDI Eye Diagram application for the video format you want to edit. A–104 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords 270Mb~525Ćline/Eye~Limits/System~Default Digital Eye Limits 270Mb 525Ćline System Default File Limits Remote Keywords Log? Highlight? Low Amplitude: RiseĆTime: FallĆTime: Rise/Fall Diff: Rise Overshoot: Fall Overshoot: DC Offset: yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 720 400 400 -------------500 880 1500 1500 500 10 10 500 mV pS pS pS % % mV -amp -rst -flt -rfd -rov -fov -dco Jitter (10Hz): Jitter (1KHz): yes yes yes yes 0 0 250 250 pS pS -j10 -j1k Consecutive error(s) before reporting: Activate Relay: Never High 2 -cep -rly Figure A–3: Eye Limits configuration file relationship to remote commands Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file Keyword Description and get/set command examples oamp oamp sets the Amplitude signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (mV), and High Limit (mV). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0 mV through 2000 mV in increments of 1 mV, and Undefined. VM700T> get oamp A no yes 720 880 VM700T> set oamp A yes yes 700 900 orst orst sets the Rise-Time signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 2000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined. VM700T> get orst A no yes 400 1500 VM700T> set orst A yes yes 300 1200 oflt oflt sets the Fall-Time signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 2000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined. VM700T> get oflt A no yes 400 1500 VM700T> set oflt A yes yes 300 1200 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–105 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples orfd orfd sets the Rise/Fall-Diff signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 2000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined. VM700T> get orfd A no yes 0 500 VM700T> set orfd A yes yes 100 800 orov orov sets the Rise Overshoot signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (%), and High Limit (%). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0% through 10% in increments of 1%, and Undefined. VM700T> get orov A no yes 0 10 VM700T> set orov A yes yes 1 8 ofov ofov sets the Fall Overshoot signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (%), and High Limit (%). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0% through 10% in increments of 1%, and Undefined. VM700T> get ofov A no yes 0 10 VM700T> set ofov A yes yes 1 8 odco odco sets the DC Offset signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (mV), and High Limit (mV). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are –1000 mV through 1000 mV in increments of 1 mV, and Undefined. VM700T> get odco A no yes -500 500 VM700T> set odco A yes yes -100 100 oj10 oj10 sets the 10 Hz Jitter signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 1000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined. VM700T> get oj10 A no yes 0 250 VM700T> set oj10 A yes yes 10 500 oj1k oj1k sets the 1 kHz Jitter signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 1000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined. VM700T> get oj1k A no yes 0 250 VM700T> set oj1k A yes yes 10 500 A–106 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples ocep ocep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel) and the number of errors. The range of values for the number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error. VM700T> get ocep A 2 VM700T> set ocep A 4 orly orly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was violated for the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log. VM700T> get orly A Never VM700T> set orly A On Highlight “z”, “p”,“u”, and “k” Group Keywords These four keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the parameters of the Wander Limits file for the four video formats listed below: The “z” group is used for the 143Mb NTSC format. The “p” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format. The “u” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format. The “k” group is used for the 360Mb Unspec format. Figure A–4 shows the relationship between the Wander Limits configuration file and the group keywords. Table A–28 lists the “p” group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands. The “z”, “u”, and “k” group keywords use the same last three characters in the keywords to perform the same function for the other three video formats. Replace the “p” character in the listed keywords with one of the “z”, “u”, and “k” group characters to set the signal limits for the video format you want to edit. VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–107 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords 270Mb~525Ćline/Wander~Limits/System~Default Remote Keywords Digital Wander Limits 270Mb 525ĆLine System Default File Low Drift Rate (peak): Frequency Offset: Consecutive error(s) before reporting: Activate Relay: Never Limits -28.0 -2800 High 28.0 2800 2 ppb/sec ppb -drt -fro -cep -rly Figure A–4: Wander Limits configuration file relationship to remote commands Table A–29: “p” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Wander Limits configuration file Keyword Description and get/set command examples pdrt pdrt sets the Drift Rate wander-limit parameters to use for measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–4. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A or B), Low Limit (ppb/sec), and High Limit (ppb/sec). The possible values for the Low Limits is –999.0 ppb/sec through 0 ppb/sec in increments of 0.1 ppb/sec, and Undefined. The possible values for the High Limits is 0 ppb/sec through 999.0 ppb/sec in increments of 0.1 ppb/sec, and Undefined. VM700T> get pdrt A -28 28 VM700T> set pdrt A -40 40 pfro pfro sets the Frequency Offset wander-limit parameters to use for measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–4. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A or B), Low Limit (ppb), and High Limit (ppb). The possible values for the Low Limits is –99990 ppb through 0 ppb in increments of 10 ppb, and Undefined. The possible values for the High Limits is 0 ppb through 99990 ppb in increments of 10 ppb, and Undefined. VM700T> get pfro A -2800 2800 VM700T> set pfro A -4000 4000 pcep pcep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A or B) and the number of errors. The range of values for the number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error. VM700T> get pcep A 2 VM700T> set pcep A 4 prly prly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was violated on the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log. VM700T> get prly A Never VM700T> set prly A On Highlight A–108 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “n” and “s” Group Keywords These two keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the parameters of the Format Setup file for the two video formats listed below: The “n” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format. The “s” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format. Figure A–5 on page A–112 and Figure A–6 on page A–113 show the relationship between the Format Setup configuration file and the group keywords. Table A–30 lists the “n” group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands. The “s” group keywords use the same last three characters in the keywords to perform the same function for the 270Mb 625-Line video format. Replace the “n” character in the listed keywords with the “s” group character to set the Format Setup for the 270Mb 625-Line video format. Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1 Keyword Description and get/set command examples nvwh nvwh sets the High Luminance Warning and High Chrominance Warning limit parameters to use for measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel (A or B). See Figure A–5. Enter the warning limits in decimal units. The possible values for the High Luminance Warning and High Chrominance Warning limits are 0 through 1023 in increments of 1 decimal unit. The High Luminance Warning limit must be less than or equal to the High Chrominance Warning limit due to an application limitation. VM700T> get nvwh A 961 986 VM700T> set nvwh A 900 1000 nvwl nvwl sets the Low Luminance Warning and Low Chrominance Warning limit parameters to use for measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel (A or B). See Figure A–5. Enter the warning limits in decimal units. The possible values for the Low Luminance Warning and Low Chrominance Warning limits are 0 through 1023 in increments of 1 decimal unit. The Low Luminance Warning limit must be greater than or equal to the Low Chrominance Warning limit due to an application limitation. VM700T> get nvwl A 63 63 VM700T> set nvwl A 100 50 nskp nskp sets the number of active video lines to skip before starting the luminance and chrominance limit checks during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel) and the number of lines to skip. The possible values for the number of video lines to skip is 0 lines through 14 lines, in increments of 1 line. VM700T> get nskp A 2 VM700T> set nskp A 5 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–109 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1 (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples nlss nlss sets the format for error detection response to a loss-of-signal error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlss A yes yes no VM700T> set nlss A no yes yes nlsa nlsa sets the format for error detection response to a loss-of-TRS-alignment error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlsa A yes yes yes VM700T> set nlsa A no yes no nlnl nlnl sets the format for error detection response to a line-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlnl A yes yes no VM700T> set nlnl A no yes yes nlnb nlnb sets the format for error detection response to a blanking-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlnb A yes yes no VM700T> set nlnb A no yes yes nlnv nlnv sets the format for error detection response to a vertical-interval-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlnv A yes yes no VM700T> set nlnv A no yes yes nlnf nlnf sets the format for error detection response to a field-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlnf A yes yes no VM700T> set nlnf A no yes yes nanh nanh sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data-header error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nanh A yes yes yes VM700T> set nanh A no yes yes A–110 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1 (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples nand nand sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data data error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nand A yes yes yes VM700T> set nand A no yes yes nanc nanc sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data checksum error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nanc A yes yes yes VM700T> set nanc A no yes yes nanp nanp sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data placement error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nanp A yes yes yes VM700T> set nanp A no yes yes naus naus sets the format for error detection response to a block-out-of-sequence ancillary-audio error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get naus A yes yes yes VM700T> set naus A no yes yes naui naui sets the format for error detection response to a broken-block ancillary-audio error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get naui A yes yes yes VM700T> set naui A no yes yes naus naus sets the format for error detection response to a samples-per-frame ancillary-audio error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get naus A yes yes yes VM700T> set naus A no yes yes nau5 nau5 sets the format for error detection response to a 5/5-pattern-broken ancillary-audio error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nau5 A yes yes yes VM700T> set nau5 A no yes yes VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–111 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords 270Mb~525Ćline/Format~Setup/System~Default Digital Format Setup 270Mb 525ĆLine System Default File 10ĆBit Only Validation Rules Luminance Chrominance 3ff 3ff 3ff 3ff 8/10ĆBit Validation Rules Luminance Chrominance 3ff 3ff 3fc 3fc Error High Warning High Valid Video Warning Low 03f 004 Error Low 003 000 3fb 3ad < = > = 3fb 3cl 3fe 3fe <same as for 8/10 bit> 03f 004 <same as for 8/10 bit> 001 001 003 000 000 000 Remote Keywords -vwh -vwl 000 000 Luminance warning range must enclose chrominance warning range (as shown by the '<=' and '>=') Skip 0 active video lines before starting Luma/Chroma warning limits checking. -skp General Errors Log? Highlight? Capture? Loss of Signal TRS Align yes yes yes yes no yes -lss -lsa Length Errors Line Blanking Vertical Interval Field yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no -lnl -lnb -lnv -lnf Ancillary Data Errors Header Data Checksum Placement yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -anh -and -anc -anp Ancillary Audio Errors Block out of Sequence Broken Block Samples / Frame 5 / 5 Pattern Broken yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -aus -aui -aus -au5 Misc. Errors XY(Z) Unused Space yes yes no no no no -mix -miu Figure A–5: Format Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands, part 1 A–112 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Video Errors Log? Highlight? Capture? Luminance Low High yes yes yes yes no no -yel -yeh Chrominance Low High yes yes yes yes no no -cel -ceh Log? Highlight? Capture? Luminance Low High yes yes yes yes no no -ywl -ywh Chrominance Low High yes yes yes yes no no -cwl -cwh Log? Highlight? Capture? EDH Full Field Active Picture Anc. Data yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no -ehf -ehp -ehd EDA Full Field Active Picture Anc. Data yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no -eaf -eap -ead IDH Full Field Active Picture Anc. Data yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no -ihf -ihp -ihd IDA Full Field Active Picture Anc. Data yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no -iaf -iap -iad UES yes yes no -ues EDH Misplaced EDH Missing yes yes yes yes yes no -ems -epl FIFO Overflow yes yes no -ues Video Warnings EDH Errors Consecutive error(s) before logging: 2 Activate Relay: On Capture -lin -rly Figure A–6: Format Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands, part 2 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–113 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 Keyword Description and get/set command examples nmix nmix sets the format for error detection response to an XY(Z) miscellaneous error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nmix A yes no no VM700T> set nmix A yes yes yes nmiu nmiu sets the format for error detection response to an unused-space miscellaneous error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nmiu A yes no no VM700T> set nmiu A yes yes yes nyel nyel sets the format for error detection response to a video low-luminance error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nyel A yes yes no VM700T> set nyel A yes yes yes nyeh nyeh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-luminance error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nyeh A yes yes no VM700T> set nyeh A yes yes yes ncel ncel sets the format for error detection response to a video low-chrominance error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get ncel A yes yes no VM700T> set ncel A yes yes yes nceh nceh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-chrominance error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nceh A yes yes no VM700T> set nceh A yes yes yes nywl nywl sets the format for error detection response to a video low-luminance warning during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nywl A yes yes no VM700T> set nywl A yes yes yes A–114 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples nywh nywh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-luminance warning during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nywh A yes yes no VM700T> set nywh A yes yes yes ncwl ncwl sets the format for error detection response to a video low-chrominance warning during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get ncwl A yes yes no VM700T> set ncwl A yes yes yes ncwh ncwh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-chrominance warning during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get ncwh A yes yes no VM700T> set ncwh A yes yes yes nehf nehf sets the format for error detection response to an EDH full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nehf A yes yes no VM700T> set nehf A yes yes yes nehp nehp sets the format for error detection response to an EDH active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nehp A yes yes no VM700T> set nehp A yes yes yes nehd nehd sets the format for error detection response to an EDH ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nehd A yes yes no VM700T> set nehd A yes yes yes neaf neaf sets the format for error detection response to an EDA full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get neaf A yes yes no VM700T> set neaf A yes yes yes VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–115 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples neap neap sets the format for error detection response to an EDA active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get neap A yes yes no VM700T> set neap A yes yes yes nead nead sets the format for error detection response to an EDA ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nead A yes yes no VM700T> set nead A yes yes yes nihf nihf sets the format for error detection response to an IDH full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nihf A yes yes no VM700T> set nihf A yes yes yes nihp nihp sets the format for error detection response to an IDH active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nihp A yes yes no VM700T> set nihp A yes yes yes nihd nihd sets the format for error detection response to an IDH ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nihd A yes yes no VM700T> set nihd A yes yes yes niaf niaf sets the format for error detection response to an IDA full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get niaf A yes yes no VM700T> set niaf A yes yes yes niap niap sets the format for error detection response to an IDA active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get niap A yes yes no VM700T> set niap A yes yes yes A–116 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples niad niad sets the format for error detection response to an IDA ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get niad A yes yes no VM700T> set niad A yes yes yes nues nues sets the format for error detection response to an UES EDH error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nues A yes yes no VM700T> set nues A yes yes yes nems nems sets the format for error detection response to an EDH misplaced error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nems A yes yes yes VM700T> set nems A yes yes no nepl nepl sets the format for error detection response to an EDH missing error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nepl A yes yes no VM700T> set nepl A yes yes yes nffo nffo sets the format for error detection response to a FIFO overflow error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no). VM700T> get nlin A yes yes no VM700T> set nlin A yes yes yes ncep ncep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), and number of errors. The range of values for the number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error. VM700T> get ncep A 2 VM700T> set ncep A 4 nrly nrly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was violated on the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log. VM700T> get nrly A Never VM700T> set nrly A On Highlight VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–117 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “a” Group Keywords “a” group keywords are channel dependent. They are used to set the digital audio setup parameters. Figure A–7 shows the relationship between the Digital Audio Setup configuration file and the “a” group keywords. Table A–32 lists the “a” group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands. Digital_Audio~Setup/System~Default Remote Keywords Digital Audio Limits System Default File Highlight? Level: Frequency: THD + N: yes yes yes yes yes yes ------------- ------------- dBr Hz % alvl afrq athd Level Diff (L-R): Phase (L-R): yes yes yes yes --------- --------- dB degrees alvd aphd dBr Reference: -20 dBFS Consecutive error(s) before logging: Activate Relay: Never Low Limits Log? High adrf acep arly 2 Figure A–7: Digital Audio Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands Table A–32: “a” keywords: Digital Audio Setup configuration file Keyword Description and get/set command examples alvl alvl sets the audio level limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (dBr), and High Limit (dBr). The possible values for the Low Level and High Level limits are –99 dBr through 99 dBr in increments of 1 dBr, and Undefined. VM700T> get alvl A no yes -50 -ā-āVM700T> set alvl A yes yes undef 50 afrq afrq sets the audio frequency limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (Hz), and High Limit (Hz). The possible values for the Low Frequency and High Frequency limits are 20 Hz through 20000 Hz in increments of 1 Hz, and Undefined. VM700T> get afrq A no yes 0 -ā-āVM700T> set afrq A yes yes undef 1000 A–118 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords Table A–32: “a” keywords: Digital Audio Setup configuration file (Cont.) Keyword Description and get/set command examples athd athd sets the audio THD + N limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (%), and High Limit (%). The possible values for the Low THD + N and High THD + N limits are 0% through 100% in increments of 0.01%, and Undefined. You need only enter a new value to the most significant decimal point of the percentage you want to enter. Returned values are to two decimal places. VM700T> get athd A no yes 0.00 -ā-āVM700T> set athd A yes yes undef 10.1 alvd alvd sets the audio level difference limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (dB), and High Limit (dB). The possible values for the Low Level and High Level limits are –99 dB through 99 dB in increments of 1 dB, and Undefined. VM700T> get alvd A no yes -50 -ā-āVM700T> set alvd A yes yes undef 50 aphd aphd sets the audio phase limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (degrees), and High Limit (degrees). The possible values for the Low Phase and High Phase limits are –180 degrees through 180 degrees in increments of 1 degree, and Undefined. VM700T> get aphd A no yes -50 -ā-āVM700T> set aphd A yes yes undef 50 adrf adrf sets the audio dBr reference to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), and dBr reference. The range for the dBr reference is –99 dBFS through 0 dBFS in increments of 1 dBFS. VM700T> get adrf A -20 VM700T> set adrf A -50 acep acep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), and number of errors. The range of values for the number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error. VM700T> get acep A 2 VM700T> set acep A 4 arly arly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was violated on the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log. VM700T> get arly A Never VM700T> set arly A On Highlight VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual A–119 Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords “G” Group Keywords Option 1S adds two commands to the existing “G” group keywords of the VM700T measurement set. Table A–33 describes the function of the two new “G” group keywords. Table A–33: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote configuration Keyword Description and get/set command examples GDSR GDSR sets the active channel (A or B) for the measured digital video source. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1. Entering a 0 sets the digital active video source to Channel A, and entering a 1 sets the digital active video source to Channel B. VM700T> get GDSR 0 VM700T> set GDSR 1 GMMO GMMO sets major operation mode of the VM700T measurement set to either analog or digital. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1. Entering a 0 sets the operation mode to Analog, and entering a 1 sets the operation mode to Digital. VM700T> get GMMO 0 VM700T> set GMMO 1 Table A–34 describes the function of two existing “G” group keywords (from the analog VM700T) that can be used with Option 1S. Table A–34: Analog “G” keywords: Remote configuration Keyword Description and get/set command examples GOOL GOOL sets the value of the global out-of-limits flag. The set command takes one argument, 0 (false) or 1 (true). This parameter is set to 1 whenever a measurement application finds a value outside of its lower-to-upper limit range. You can test the status of the global out-of-limits flag with the ?GOOL command. You must reset the global out-of-limits flag to 0 explicitly within a function; it does not return to 0 when tested. VM700T> get GOOL 0 VM700T> set GOOL 1 GRLY GRLY sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was violated. You can use this command in conjunction with the GOOL command to activate the Alarm relay. You can use the following arguments with this command: 0 (open relay) or 1 (close relay). VM700T> get GRLY 0 VM700T> set GRLY 1 A–120 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files This chapter shows the results file produced by each VM700T application. The sample files shown in this chapter are all produced by executing the following sequence of commands: execute application getresults show application The VM700T applications are grouped as shown in Table B–1 through Table B–8. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table B–1: NTSC/PAL measurements Auto GroupDelay~SinX_X MultiBurst Bar~LineTime H_Blank Noise~Spectrum Bounce H_Timing SCH_Phase Burst~Frequency ICPM ShortTime~Distortion ChromLum~GainDelay Jitter TwoField Chrominance~AMPM Jitter~Long_Time VITS~ID (NTSC only) Chrominance~FreqResp (NTSC only) K_Factor V_Blank Chrominance~NonLinearity Level~Meter Video~Standard ColorBar (NTSC)/ ColourBar (PAL) Line~Frequency DGDP Luminance~NonLinearity Table B–2: Echo/Rounding (Option 1G) measurements ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Echo VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Rounding~Errors B–1 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table B–3: Serial Digital (Option 1S) measurements SDI_AncData SDI_EyeDiagram SDI_Picture SDI_AncDist SDI_Format SDI_Wander SDI_AudioFormat SDI_IC_Timing SDI_Waveform SDI_AudioMeas SDI_Jitter SDI_AV_Timing SDI_Lightning Table B–4: Teletext (Option 20) measurements ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Teletext SoundInSync Table B–5: Camera Testing (Option 21) measurements Colorimetry Defects Fixed_Pattern~Noise Frequency~Response ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table B–6: Video Wander (Option 22) measurement Wander Table B–7: Component (Option 30) measurements Bowtie Component~LevelMeter Component~Vector Component~Channel_Delay Component~Multiburst Lightning Component~ColorBar Component~Noise Component~K_Factor Component~NonLinearity Table B–8: Audio (Option 40 and 41) measurements B–2 Audio~Analyzer Calibrate~AudioBoard Audio~Monitor Identify~Audio_Hardware Audio~Spectrum Multitone View_Audio~Auto_Test VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files NTSC/PAL Results Files Note that results files from NTSC measurements frequently contain a line in the header that reads “Field = X Line = Y”. The corresponding line in results files from PAL measurements reads simply “Line = Y”. Except for this line, NTSC and PAL measurement results files do not differ, unless otherwise noted. Auto (NTSC) Channel A Source System Default Fri Aug 30 16:42:20 1996 VM700T Video Measurement Set System Default Violated Limits Lower Upper Source ID ---Not Found Bar Top ------ % Carr ** 10.0 15.0 ZC Pulse Unselected Blanking Level ------ % Carr ** 72.5 77.5 ZC Pulse Unselected Bar Amplitude 100.5 IRE Sync Amplitude 40.1 % Bar Blanking Variation ------ % Carr ZC Pulse Unselected Blanking Variation 0.2 % Bar Sync Variation ------ % Carr ** 0.0 5.0 ZC Pulse Unselected Sync Variation 0.1 % Bar Burst Amplitude 100.3 % Sync Burst Amplitude 40.2 % Bar FCC H Blanking 11.24 us FCC Sync Width 4.84 us FCC Sync-Setup 9.66 us FCC Front Porch 1.57 us Sync to Burst End 7.86 us * 5.00 7.80 Breezeway Width 0.54 us FCC Burst Width 8.9 Cycles Sync Risetime 141 ns Sync Falltime 140 ns RS-170A H Blanking 11.42 us ** 10.65 11.15 RS-170A Sync Width 4.70 us RS-170A Sync-Setup 9.59 us ** 9.28 9.52 RS-170A Front Porch 1.65 us ** 1.38 1.62 Sync to Burst Start 5.31 us RS-170A Burst Width 9.0 Cycles V Blank 4 IRE F1 21.0 Lines * 18.5 20.5 V Blank 4 IRE F2 21.0 Lines * 18.5 20.5 V Blank 20 IRE F1 21.0 Lines * 20.1 20.9 V Blank 20 IRE F2 21.1 Lines * 20.1 20.9 FCC Equalizer 51.0 % S.W. FCC Serration 4.51 us RS-170A Equalizer 2.33 us RS-170A Serration 4.66 us VIRS Setup 7.5 % Bar VIRS Luminance Ref 50.1 % Bar VIRS Chroma Ampl 99.9 % Burst VIRS Chroma Ampl 40.1 % Bar VIRS Chroma Phase -0.1 Deg Line Time Distortion 0.1 % Pulse/Bar Ratio 99.1 % 2T Pulse K-Factor 0.2 % Kf IEEE-511 ST Dist ------ % SD ** 0.0 3.0 No NTC-7 Comp VITS S/N NTC7 Unweighted 77.2 dB RMS S/N NTC7 Lum-Wghtd 80.6 dB RMS S/N Unif Unweighted 76.7 dB RMS VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–3 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files S/N Unif Lum-Wghtd 80.7 S/N Periodic -----S/N.2 NTC7 Unwghtd 78.0 S/N.2 NTC7 Lum-Wghtd 82.1 S/N.2 Unif Unwghtd 77.4 S/N.2 Unif Lum-Wghtd 82.3 Chroma-Lum Delay 1.7 Chroma-Lum Gain 100.3 Differential Gain 0.21 Differential Phase 0.09 Lum Non-Linearity 0.39 Relative Burst Gain 0.00 Relative Burst Phase -0.02 FCC Multiburst Flag -----FCC Multiburst Flag -----FCC MB Packet #1 -----FCC MB Packet #2 -----FCC MB Packet #3 -----FCC MB Packet #4 -----FCC MB Packet #5 -----FCC MB Packet #6 -----NTC7 Multiburst Flag -----NTC7 Multiburst Flag 100.0 NTC7 MB Packet #1 49.9 NTC7 MB Packet #2 49.8 NTC7 MB Packet #3 50.0 NTC7 MB Packet #4 50.2 NTC7 MB Packet #5 50.1 NTC7 MB Packet #6 50.1 NTC7 20 IRE Chroma 20.0 NTC7 80 IRE Chroma 79.9 NTC7 Chr NL Phase 0.2 NTC7 Chr-Lum Intmd 0.1 ICPM -----SCH Phase -3.1 Field Time Dist ------FCC Color Bars Amplitude Error ( % ) Yellow 0.1 Cyan 0.2 Green 0.2 Magenta -0.1 Red 0.1 Blue 0.3 dB dB dB dB dB dB ns % % Deg % % Deg % Carr % Bar % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Carr % Bar % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag IRE IRE Deg IRE Deg Deg % Bar RMS 57.0 ------ Random >> Periodic RMS RMS RMS RMS ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 10.0 90.0 57.1 56.2 54.8 53.5 56.0 15.0 110.0 63.0 64.2 65.6 67.3 64.3 ** 10.0 15.0 At At At At At No No No No No No No No ZC 48% APL 48% APL 48% APL 48% APL 48% APL FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst FCC Multiburst Pulse Unselected (Ref 40 IRE Chr) (Ref 40 IRE Chr) ** -3.0 (Ref Lum Pedestal) 3.0 ZC Pulse Unselected ** -3.00 3.00 Not Found Phase Error ( Deg ) 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 Chr/Lum Ratio Error ( % ) -0.1 -0.1 -0.0 -0.5 -0.2 -0.3 Auto (PAL) Channel B Source System Default Fri Aug 30 16:45:12 1996 VM700T Video Measurement Set System Default Violated Limits Lower Upper Source ID ---Not Found Luminance Bar Ampl ------ mV ** 600.0 800.0 Bar Not Found Luminance Bar Ampl ------ % Carr ** 55.0 73.0 Bar Not Found Lum Bar Ampl Err ------ % ** -10.0 10.0 Bar Not Found Line Time Distortion ------ % Bar ** 0.0 10.0 Bar Not Found Bar Tilt (Rec 569) ------ % Bar ** -10.0 10.0 Bar Not Found Bar Rise Time ------ ns ** 160.0 240.0 Bar Not Found Baseline Distortion ------ % Bar ** -2.0 2.0 Bar Not Found Blanking Level ------ % Carr ** 69.0 79.0 Bar Not Found B–4 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Sync/Bar (Rel 3/7) Sync to Bar Top Pulse/Bar Ratio Err 2T Pulse K-factor C/L Gn Err (Mod Bar) Chr/Lum Delay Ineq C/L Gn Err (Mod Pls) Lum. Nonlin. Dist. Chrom Ref Ampl Err Pk-Pk Diff Gain Peak Diff Gain Pk-Pk Diff Phase Peak Diff Phase Chr/Lum Intermod Sync Amplitude Sync Ampl Error Residual Carrier Sync-to-Burst Start Burst Duration Burst Duration Burst Amplitude Burst Ampl Error Burst Ampl Diff Burst Quad Error SCH Phase Sync Duration Sync Rise Time Sync Fall Time Front Porch Line Blanking Broad Pulse Sep Equalizing Pulse Multiburst Flag Multiburst Flag MB Packet #1 MB Packet #2 MB Packet #3 MB Packet #4 MB Packet #5 MB Packet #6 CCIR LF Error 50-550 Hz LF Error 10-1000 Hz LF Error S/N Unweighted (567) S/N Lum-wgtd (567) S/N Chr-wgtd S/N Periodic S/N Unweighted (569) S/N Lum-wgtd (569) S/N.2 Unwgtd (567) S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (567) S/N.2 Chr-wgtd S/N.2 Unwgtd (569) S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (569) ICPM (Absolute) ICPM (Rel Blanking) Field Time Dist ----------------------------------------------------------------------302.2 0.7 -----5.51 2.18 9.7 307.7 2.6 0.5 -0.2 5.8 4.68 251.3 251.2 ------------4.66 2.34 ----------------------------------------0.1 0.2 0.1 79.2 84.9 83.6 72.0 80.7 88.2 75.0 78.4 72.6 76.9 84.0 ---------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual % mV % Bar % Kf % Bar ns % Bar % % % % Deg Deg % Bar mV % % Carr us us Cycles mV % % Deg Deg us ns ns us us us us % Bar mV % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Flag % Bar % Bar % Bar dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Deg Deg % ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 80.0 120.0 Bar Not Found 870.0 1130.0 Bar Not Found -20.0 20.0 Pulse Not Found 0.0 4.0 Pulse Not Found -20.0 20.0 Not Found -50.0 50.0 Pulse Not Found -20.0 20.0 Not Found -----10.0 No Luminance Steps -10.0 10.0 Not Found -----20.0 Not Found -----20.0 Not Found -----20.0 Not Found -----20.0 Not Found -10.0 10.0 Not Found ** 7.5 15.0 Bar Not Found ** ** 0.50 9.10 3.00 No Blanking Edge 16.00 No Blanking Edge ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 50.0 350.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 ** ** ** -20.0 -20.0 -2.0 70.0 490.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 No Multiburst No Multiburst No Multiburst No Multiburst No Multiburst No Multiburst No Multiburst No Multiburst No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV No Bar - Ref. 700 mV 20.0 No Luminance Steps 20.0 No Luminance Steps 2.0 Not Found B–5 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Bar~LineTime (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:00:05 Bar & LineTime Waveform->FCC Composite Field = 1 Line = 18 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Bar Level(Ref. b1) 99.5 IRE Bar Level(Back Porch) 99.6 IRE Sync Level 40.0 IRE Sync to Bar Top 139.6 IRE Sync/Bar Ratio 100.5 % LineTime Dist (Rec. 567) 0.1 % Bar Tilt (Rec. 569) 0.1 % Bar Width 18.0 u sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Bounce (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 21 08:52:53 Bounce Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------(High APL) Settling Time 0.0 sec Blanking Dev. (+) 0.2 % Blanking Dev. (-) -0.2 % Blanking Dev. (P-P) 0.4 % Sync Amplitude 40.0 IRE Sync Amp. Dev. (+) 0.5 % Sync Amp. Dev. (-) -0.4 % Sync Amp. Dev. (P-P) 0.9 % Bounce Amplitude 100.1 IRE Bounce Amp. Dev. (+) 0.1 % Bounce Amp. Dev. (-) -0.1 % Bounce Amp. Dev. (P-P) 0.3 % (Low APL) Settling Time 0.0 sec Blanking Dev. (+) 0.1 % Blanking Dev. (-) -0.2 % Blanking Dev. (P-P) 0.3 % Sync Amplitude 39.9 IRE Sync Amp. Dev. (+) 0.6 % Sync Amp. Dev. (-) -0.6 % Sync Amp. Dev. (P-P) 1.1 % (High,Low APL) Blank Level Diff. 0.1 % Sync Amp. Diff -0.1 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Burst~Frequency (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:03:45 Burst Frequency Measurement (Ref. Ch-B Burst) Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Burst Frequency Error -0.2 Hz ---------------------------------------------------------------------- B–6 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files ChromLum~GainDelay (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:04:22 Chrom/Lum Gain Delay Waveform->FCC Composite Field = 1 Line = 18 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Chroma Gain 92.5 % Chroma Delay -3.7 n sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Chrominance~AMPM (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:04:59 Chrominance AMPM Waveform->appropriate Full Field (Both Fields) Band width 100Hz to 500kHz Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------AM Noise -64.3 dB rms PM Noise -64.2 dB rms ---------------------------------------------------------------------(0 dB = 714 mV p-p with AGC for 100% Chrominance Level) Chrominance~FreqResp (NTSC only) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:06:41 Chrominance Freq Resp Waveform->FCC Multi Burst Field = 1 Line = 50 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------0 dB = Packet #3 56.4 IRE Packet #1 0.5 Mhz 0.15 dB Packet #2 1.2 Mhz 0.10 dB Packet #3 2.0 Mhz 0.00 dB Packet #4 3.0 Mhz -5.88 dB * -2.00 1.00 Packet #5 4.1 Mhz -5.14 dB * -3.00 1.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Chrominance~NonLinearity (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:07:20 Chrominance NonLinearity Waveform->Mod 3 Step Field = 1 Line = 50 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Chroma Amp (Packet 1) 1.4 % Chroma Amp (Packet 2) 0.0 Ref. Chroma Amp (Packet 3) -0.6 % Chroma Phase (Packet 1) -0.7 deg. Chroma Phase (Packet 2) 0.0 Ref. Chroma Phase (Packet 3) -0.4 deg. Chroma Intermod. (Packet 1) 0.2 % Chroma Intermod. (Packet 2) 0.1 % Chroma Intermod. (Packet 3) -0.1 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–7 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files ColorBar (NTSC & PAL) Note that the name of this measurement (according to the results file) is “ColorBar” for NTSC and “ColourBar” for PAL. Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:07:45 ColorBar Waveform->FCC Color Bar Field = 1 Line = 50 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Luma Level (Gray) 95.2 IRE Luma Level (Yellow) 64.3 IRE Luma Level (Cyan) 50.7 IRE Luma Level (Green) 42.8 IRE * 43.5 53.2 Luma Level (Magenta) 30.0 IRE * 32.3 39.5 Luma Level (Red) 22.1 IRE * 25.5 31.1 Luma Level (Blue) 8.2 IRE * 13.6 16.7 Luma Level (Black) 0.1 IRE * 6.7 8.3 Chroma Level (Gray) 0.1 IRE Chroma Level (Yellow) 60.1 IRE Chroma Level (Cyan) 86.3 IRE Chroma Level (Green) 81.4 IRE Chroma Level (Magenta) 81.7 IRE Chroma Level (Red) 87.4 IRE Chroma Level (Blue) 61.8 IRE Chroma Level (Black) 0.0 IRE Chroma Phase (Yellow) 166.7 deg Chroma Phase (Cyan) 283.5 deg Chroma Phase (Green) 240.9 deg Chroma Phase (Magenta) 60.9 deg Chroma Phase (Red) 103.5 deg Chroma Phase (Blue) 347.0 deg ---------------------------------------------------------------------- DGDP (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:08:06 Differential Gain & Phase Waveform->NTC-7 Composite Field = 2 Line = 18 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Differential Gain (min) -6.10 % * -5.00 5.00 Differential Gain (max) 0.79 % Differential Gain (p-p) 6.83 % Differential Phase (min) -1.41 deg Differential Phase (max) 1.02 deg Differential Phase (p-p) 2.43 deg ---------------------------------------------------------------------- B–8 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files GroupDelay~SinX_X (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:08:52 Group Delay & Gain vs Frequency (SinX/X) Waveform->Sin X/X Field = 2 Line = 44 Reference Frequency at 0.20 MHz Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Amplitude (0.5 MHz) -0.0 dB Amplitude (1.0 MHz) -0.1 dB Amplitude (2.5 MHz) -0.2 dB Amplitude (3.0 MHz) -0.2 dB Amplitude (3.6 MHz) -0.4 dB Amplitude (4.0 MHz) -0.6 dB * -0.5 0.5 Amplitude (4.2 MHz) -0.6 dB GroupDelay (0.5 MHz) -5.5 n sec GroupDelay (1.0 MHz) 15.9 n sec * -15.0 15.0 GroupDelay (2.5 MHz) 2.9 n sec GroupDelay (3.0 MHz) 3.2 n sec GroupDelay (3.6 MHz) 19.3 n sec * -15.0 15.0 GroupDelay (4.0 MHz) 13.8 n sec GroupDelay (4.2 MHz) -6.5 n sec Cursor (3.58 MHz) -0.4 dB 19.3 n sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- H_Blank (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:09:28 H_Blank 4 IRE (Field 1) (Line 22 to 260) ---------------------------------------------------------------------H Blank Start -1.69 u sec H Blank End 9.47 u sec H Blank Width 11.15 u sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- H_Timing (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:09:50 H Timing (RS-170A) Field = 2 Line = 44 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Rise Time 148.8 n sec Sync Fall Time 143.0 n sec Sync Width 4.71 u sec Sync Level 40.9 IRE Burst Level 39.2 IRE Sync to Burst Start 5.31 u sec Burst Width 9.0 cycles Front Porch 1.70 u sec Sync to SetUp 9.48 u sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–9 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files ICPM (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:10:27 ICPM Field = 2 Line = 44 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Min Angle = -67.71 degrees * -5.0 5.0 Max Angle = 66.33 degrees * -5.0 5.0 Pk-Pk Angle = 134.04 degrees (Absolute) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Jitter (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:10:50 Jitter Measurement (Line 20 to 250) Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Peak to Peak Jitter 4.2 n sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Jitter~Long_Time (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:11:20 Jitter Long Time Measurement Frequency Lock Speed 1 sec Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Peak to Peak Jitter 0.006 u sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- K_Factor (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:11:49 2T Pulse K Factor Waveform->FCC Composite Field = 1 Line = 18 Graticule EIA-2T Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------K-2T 0.3 % KF K-PB -0.1 % KF PB Ratio 99.6 % HAD 254.9 n sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Level~Meter (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Dec 20 15:57:43 Level Meter Waveform->FCC Multi Burst Field = 1 Line = 100 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Level(b-a) 288.3 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------a <-- 6.5 u sec b <-- 35.5 u sec B–10 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Line~Frequency (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:12:03 Line Frequency Measurement Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Line Frequency Error -0.007 % Line Frequency 15.733 kHz Field Frequency 59.94 Hz ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Luminance~NonLinearity (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:12:17 Luma Non Linearity Waveform->FCC Composite Field = 1 Line = 18 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------LumaNonLinearity (p-p) 3.3 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- MultiBurst (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:12:40 Multi Burst Waveform->FCC Multi Burst Field = 1 Line = 17 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------0 dB = 60 % of Flag 101.9 IRE Packet #1 0.50 MHz 0.15 dB Packet #2 1.25 MHz 0.10 dB Packet #3 2.00 MHz 0.04 dB Packet #4 3.00 MHz -0.06 dB Packet #5 3.58 MHz -0.24 dB Packet #6 4.10 MHz -0.37 dB ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Noise~Spectrum (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:13:50 Noise Spectrum Waveform->Pedestal Field = 1 Line = 10 Band width 100kHz to 5.0MHz (SC trap) (Tilt Null) Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Noise Level -60.3 dB rms Cursor 1 -70.0 dB p-p at 1.96 MHz Cursor 2 -107.2 dB p-p at 3.58 MHz -37.2 dB Diff Noise Area in Cursors -66.3 dB rms ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SCH_Phase (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:14:36 SCH Phase Average off ------------------------------------------------------------------------SCH Phase -2.3 deg ------------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–11 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files ShortTime~Distortion (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:15:07 Short Time Distortion Waveform->NTC-7 Composite Field = 2 Line = 18 Graticule IEEE-511 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Rising Edge 0.7 % SD Rise Time 131.5 nSec * 120.0 130.0 Falling Edge 0.9 % SD Fall Time 130.0 nSec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- TwoField (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:15:37 TwoField Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Field Time Dist 13.1 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------APL = 51.8 % Slow Clamp at Back Porch Luminance at (35.0 usec), Sync & Back Porch are displayed VITS~ID (NTSC only) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:16:09 Signal ID (System Line) Waveform->NTC-7 Composite Field = 2 Line = 18 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Field 1 Field 2 Line 15 --> GCR 8 Fields Seq. Line 15 --> GCR 8 Fields Seq. Line 16 --> VIRS Line 16 --> Sin X/X Line 17 --> FCC Multi Burst Line 17 --> NTC-7 Combination Line 18 --> FCC Composite Line 18 --> NTC-7 Composite Line 19 --> Pedestal Line 19 --> Red Field Line 20 --> Luminance Bar Line 20 --> Mod Pedestal F-line ---------------------------------------------------------------------- V_Blank (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:16:49 V Timing Measurement Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Equalizer Pulse 2.33 u sec Equalizer Pulse 10% 2.47 u sec Serration Pulse 4.66 u sec Serration Pulse 10% 4.51 u sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- B–12 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Video~Standard (NTSC & PAL) Video Standard Fri Aug 30 16:17:56 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Source A: NTSC Source B: NTSC Source C: PAL ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Option 1G (Echo/Rounding) Results Files Echo (NTSC & PAL) Echo Application Results: Fri Aug 30 16:33:33 Channel A ---------------------------------------------------------------------Cursor Time percent of Peak dB rel Curve 1 1 406 nsec 0.14 -36.96 2 605 nsec 0.00 -129.50 Rounding~Errors (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:33:59 Rounding Errors Waveform->Pulse Line = 96 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------(From 0.40 uS to 1.00 uS) Rounding of White 0.3 % Rounding of Black 0.0 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Option 1S (Serial Digital) Results Files SDI_AncData Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:02:30 SDI_AncData 270Mb 525-line Validate 8/10-Bit Luminance Legal Range: 040-3ac Chrominance Legal Range: 040-3c0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Line 17 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–13 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files SDI_AncDist Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:03:48 SDI_AncDist 270Mb 525-line Samples Show All ---------------------------------------------------------------------Frame Total 32 Maximum 16 Minimum 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_AudioFormat Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:11:54 SDI_AudioFormat 270Mb 525-line Source Embedded, Group: 1, Channel: 1 & 2 Channel Status Data Byte Status -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Ch. 1 Channel use 1 0 professional Ch. 1 Data use 0 0 audio Ch. 1 Emphasis 110 0 50/15 us Ch. 1 Locking of source 0 0 locked Ch. 1 Sample frequency 01 0 48 kHz Ch. 1 Channel mode 0001 1 2-channel Ch. 1 User bits mode 0001 1 192-bit blocks Ch. 1 AUX bits use 000 2 not indicated Ch. 1 Audio word length 101 2 20 bits Ch. 1 Reference signal 00 4 not a ref. Ch. 1 Origin 80808080 6 Ch. 1 Destination 80808080 10 Ch. 1 Sample number 0000 14 0 Ch. 1 Time of day 0000 18 00:00:00 Ch. 1 Block CRC 01010101 23 is valid Ch. 2 Channel use 1 0 professional Ch. 2 Data use 0 0 audio Ch. 2 Emphasis 110 0 50/15 us Ch. 2 Locking of source 0 0 locked Ch. 2 Sample frequency 01 0 48 kHz Ch. 2 Channel mode 0001 1 2-channel Ch. 2 User bits mode 0001 1 192-bit blocks Ch. 2 AUX bits use 000 2 not indicated Ch. 2 Audio word length 101 2 20 bits Ch. 2 Reference signal 00 4 not a ref. Ch. 2 Origin 80808080 6 Ch. 2 Destination 80808080 10 Ch. 2 Sample number 0000 14 0 Ch. 2 Time of day 0000 18 00:00:00 Ch. 2 Block CRC 01010101 23 is valid ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ B–14 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files SDI_AudioMeas Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:11:00 SDI_AudioMeas 270Mb 525-line Source Embedded, Channel: 1 & 2, Group: 1, 0 dBr = -20 dBFS Measurement Cur Min Max MinL MaxL Units -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Left Level -0.0 -0.0 -0.0 ----- dBr Right Level -10.0 -10.0 -10.0 ----- dBr Left Frequency 800.0 800.0 800.0 ----- Hz Right Frequency 2000.0 2000.0 2000.0 ----- Hz Left THD + N 0.0017 0.0017 0.0017 ----- % Right THD + N 0.0044 0.0044 0.0044 ----- % Level Difference 10.0 10.0 10.0 ----- dB Phase -72.0 -72.0 144.0 ----- deg Left Stuckbits (23-20) ---Left Stuckbits (19-16) ---Left Stuckbits (15-12) ---Left Stuckbits (11-08) ---Left Stuckbits (07-04) ---Left Stuckbits (03-00) 0000 Right Stuckbits (23-20) ---Right Stuckbits (19-16) ---Right Stuckbits (15-12) ---Right Stuckbits (11-08) ---Right Stuckbits (07-04) ---Right Stuckbits (03-00) 0000 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ SDI_AV_Timing Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:01:43 SDI_AV_Timing 270Mb 525-line Source: Embedded, Group: 1, Channel: 1 & 2, TG2000 Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------Audio delay --------------- ms ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–15 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files SDI_EyeDiagram Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:04:53 SDI_EyeDiagram 270Mb 525-line Measurement Cur Min Max MinL MaxL Units ---------------------------------------------------------------------Amplitude 491 165 491 720.0 880.0 mv * Rise-Time 965 0 1321 400.0 1500.0 ps * Fall-Time 1013 0 1659 400.0 1500.0 ps * Rise/Fall Diff. 48 0 367 --- 500.0 ps Rise Overshoot 1.9 0.0 361.1 --- 10.0 % * Fall Overshoot 1.6 0.0 19.1 --- 10.0 % * DC Offset 2093.0 9.8 2093.0 -500.0 500.0 mv * Alig. Jitter (1 kHz) 260 10 2971 --- 250.0 ps * Cable Len (Bel. 8281) 0 meters ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_Format Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:15:29 SDI_Format 270Mb 525-line Validate 8/10-Bit Check Audio BrokenBlk Ch: Off Luminance Legal Range: 040-3ac Chrominance Legal Range: 040-3c0 Error Type Count Status ---------------------------------------------------------------------Loss of Signal 0 display,log Loss of TRS Align 0 display,log Line Length 0 display,log Horz. Blanking Length 0 display,log Vert. Blanking Length 0 display,log Length of Field 0 display,log Ancillary Header 0 display,log Ancillary Data 0 display,log Ancillary Checksum 0 display,log Ancillary Placement 0 display,log Anc. Audio Sequence 0 display,log Anc. Audio Broken Block 0 display,log Anc. Audio Smpls/Frame 0 display,log Anc. Audio 5/5 Pattern 0 display,log Luma Warning Low 0 display,log Luma Warning High 0 display,log Luma Error Low 0 display,log Luma Error High 0 display,log Chroma Warning Low 0 display,log Chroma Warning High 0 display,log Chroma Error Low 0 display,log Chroma Error High 0 display,log XY(Z) Status Word 0 display,log B–16 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Blanking Empty Space 0 display,log EDH FF 0 display,log EDH AP 0 display,log EDH AD 0 display,log EDA FF 0 display,log EDA AP 0 display,log EDA AD 0 display,log IDH FF 0 display,log IDH AP 0 display,log IDH AD 0 display,log IDA FF 0 display,log IDA AP 0 display,log IDA AD 0 display,log EDH Missing 0 display,log EDH Placement 0 display,log EDH UES 0 display,log FIFO Overflow 0 display,log Errored Seconds 0 display Elapsed Seconds 5 display ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_IC_Timing Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 12:59:47 SDI_IC_Timing 270Mb 525-line Relative to digital ---------------------------------------------------------------------Delta (from A) ---------------uSecs ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_Jitter Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:04:23 SDI_Jitter 270Mb 525-line ---------------------------------------------------------------------Display Frame Rate Filter 10 Hz Timing Jitter 0.028 UI Alignment Jitter 0.020 UI ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–17 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files SDI_Lightning Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:14:03 SDI_Lightning 270Mb 525-line Field = 1 Line = 17 Reference Colorbars: 75% SMPTE/EBU Pk-white (100%) 700.0 mV, Color Pk-to-Pk 525.0 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------Color Pk-to-Pk B-Y 0.0 mV Color Pk-to-Pk R-Y 0.0 mV Pk-white 0.0 mV Delay B-Y --------------- ns Delay R-Y --------------- ns ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_Picture Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 13:16:54 SDI_Picture 270Mb 525-line ---------------------------------------------------------------------Fld 1 Ln 22 24-Mar-98 13:16:54 Peak 781 mV Black 0 mV 270Mb 525-line (Auto detect) White 714 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_Wander Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 12:58:26 SDI_Wander 270Mb 525-line Drift Rate, LP Corner = 0.5 Hz ---------------------------------------------------------------------Maximum 15.45 ppb/sec Minimum -7.79 ppb/sec Peak 0.06 Hz ---------------------------------------------------------------------- SDI_Waveform Measurement Results Channel A Tue Mar 24 12:57:36 SDI_Waveform 270Mb 525-line ---------------------------------------------------------------------Line 17 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- B–18 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Option 20 (Teletext) Results Files SoundInSync (PAL Only) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:37:29 SoundInSync Line = 96 (SIS mode) Accumulation 200 times ---------------------------------------------------------------------(Eye Threshold = 1/250) Eye Height 86.2 % 201.0 mV (At Clock) Eye Width 77.5 % (At Middle) '3' Level 370.8 mV '2' Level 147.1 mV '1' Level -86.1 mV '0' Level -310.9 mV P-P Amplitude 106.0 % 722.5 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Teletext (NTSC & PAL) Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 30 16:19:59 Teletext Waveform->Teletext Field = 1 Line = 15 Accumulation 400 times Timing Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------(Eye Threshold = 1/250) Eye Height 45.9 % * 70.0 100.0 28.1 IRE * 49.0 70.0 (At Clock) Eye Width 58.1 % * 70.0 100.0 (At Middle) '1' Level 66.0 IRE * 67.5 72.5 '0' Level 4.7 IRE * -2.5 2.5 P-P Amplitude 156.8 % * 100.0 130.0 96.1 IRE * 70.0 91.0 Run-In Start 9.91 u sec Run-In Bits 16.0 bits Data Line Width 50.32 u sec * 52.00 59.00 Data End to Sync 3.32 u sec * 1.00 3.00 Run-In Amplitude 52.7 IRE * 67.5 72.5 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–19 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Option 21 (Camera Testing) Results Files NOTE. These files show the types of results obtainable from the measurements. The results shown were not obtained using camera signals. Detail Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 21 08:19:06 Detail Camera: cam1 Field = 1 Line = 22 (Synchronous) Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Detail (H Rising Edge) >>>>>> % Detail (H Falling Edge) >>>>>> % Detail (V Rising Edge) ------ % Detail (V Falling Edge) ------ % ---------------------------------------------------------------------Field Rate Display Position 36.0 u sec Gamma Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Aug 21 08:27:08 Gamma Camera: cam1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Gamma (A) -----Gamma (B) -----Gamma (C) --------------------------------------------------------------------------(A) (B) (C) step #1 172.3 171.5 171.0 mV step #2 172.8 172.0 171.2 mV step #3 172.8 172.8 172.2 mV step #4 172.4 172.7 171.8 mV step #5 71.7 72.0 71.6 mV step #6 554.6 549.2 545.2 mV step #7 643.1 641.1 639.4 mV step #8 544.8 542.5 541.7 mV step #9 544.9 542.5 541.8 mV step #10 544.0 542.8 542.1 mV step #11 544.0 542.5 541.8 mV Geometry~Registration Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Aug 21 08:21:06 Geometry/Registration Camera: cam1 Porta-Pattern Chart Averaged 0 Frames ---------------------------------------------------------------------Geometry (Ch A): Results Unavailable Registration (Ch B): Results Unavailable Registration (Ch C): Results Unavailable B–20 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Shading Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 21 08:20:21 Shading Camera: cam1 Acquired 1 Frame ---------------------------------------------------------------------Ave. Video Level: 10.0 IRE V. Shading: 0.5 % H Shading (Averaged): 82.0 % H. Shading @ F1 L 22: 81.8 % Max. H. Sh @ F1 L 23: 82.2 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Widthg 1.0 uSec Measurement Position: Center 35.0 uSec from sync Vertical~Smear Measurement Results Channel A Fri Aug 21 08:19:46 Vertical Smear Camera: cam1 Reference White Level 98 IRE at f Stop Undefined Smear Threshold Level 1 IRE at f Stop Undefined Above aperture smear -21.1 IRE Below aperture smear -20.9 IRE Eq. :: 20 * log(Ref White / Threshold) + 20 * log((Ref Iris / Smr Iris) ^ 2) ---------------------------------------------------------------------Smear: ----- dB ---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Width 1.0 uSec Measurement Positions: Aperture Center 35.0 uSec from sync Reference Center 20.0 uSec from sync Reference White Level measured on F1 Line 102 Above aperture smear measured on F1 Line 9 Below aperture smear measured on F1 Line 189 Colorimetry Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 11:51:31 Colorimetry Camera ID: Camera 1 Macbeth Chart, 24 Color Chips 3100K (Studio) SMPTE Phosphors Nominal Gamma Default Ref. ---------------------------------------------------------------------DE DH Dk. Skin = 46.0, 2.0 Lt. Skin = 75.4, 1.4 Blue Sky = 53.0, 16.9 Foliage = 42.3, 13.0 Bl. Flower = 54.5, 11.1 Bl. Green = 82.4, 23.2 Orange = 99.9, 5.3 Prpl. Blue = 53.0, 19.2 Mod. Red = 106.9, 0.4 Purple = 35.9, 5.8 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–21 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Yw. Green = 77.1, 19.6 Or. Yellow = 91.3, 6.1 Blue = 52.0, 17.5 Green = 75.2, 23.9 Red = 122.0, 1.0 Yellow = 92.3, 9.1 Magenta = 98.1, 2.6 Cyan = 75.0, 25.3 White = 92.1, 2.9 Neutrl 8 = 77.0, 1.6 Neutrl 6.5 = 61.6, 2.0 Neutrl 5 = 46.4, 2.2 Neutrl 3.5 = 30.1, 2.5 Black = 15.1, 0.1 Average Weighted DE = 69.0 Average Weighted DH = 8.9 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Width: 8 cycles ( 2.2 uSec) Measurement Positions: Packet # 1, F1 L 50, Center 13.0 uSec from sync Packet # 2, F1 L 50, Center 22.0 uSec from sync Packet # 3, F1 L 50, Center 30.9 uSec from sync Packet # 4, F1 L 50, Center 39.5 uSec from sync Packet # 5, F1 L 50, Center 48.0 uSec from sync Packet # 6, F1 L 50, Center 56.7 uSec from sync Packet # 7, F1 L105, Center 13.0 uSec from sync Packet # 8, F1 L105, Center 22.0 uSec from sync Packet # 9, F1 L105, Center 30.9 uSec from sync Packet #10, F1 L105, Center 39.5 uSec from sync Packet #11, F1 L105, Center 48.0 uSec from sync Packet #12, F1 L105, Center 56.7 uSec from sync Packet #13, F1 L160, Center 13.0 uSec from sync Packet #14, F1 L160, Center 22.0 uSec from sync Packet #15, F1 L160, Center 30.9 uSec from sync Packet #16, F1 L160, Center 39.5 uSec from sync Packet #17, F1 L160, Center 48.0 uSec from sync Packet #18, F1 L160, Center 56.7 uSec from sync Packet #19, F1 L220, Center 13.0 uSec from sync Packet #20, F1 L220, Center 22.0 uSec from sync Packet #21, F1 L220, Center 30.9 uSec from sync Packet #22, F1 L220, Center 39.5 uSec from sync Packet #23, F1 L220, Center 48.0 uSec from sync Packet #24, F1 L220, Center 56.7 uSec from sync Defects Measurement Results Channel A Thu Aug 29 17:43:05 CCD Defects Camera: Camera 1 Room Temperature: 20.0 Celsius, 68 Fahrenheit CCD H. Density: 728 Pixels Threshold: 250 mV Averaged 32 Frames Largest Defect: 23 Pixels Max Dev. Found: 404.9 mV 91 Bad Pixels Found ---------------------------------------------------------------------There is 1 Defect With 23 Bad Pixel(s). There are 2 Defects With 18 Bad Pixel(s) Each. There is 1 Defect With 14 Bad Pixel(s). There is 1 Defect With 5 Bad Pixel(s). B–22 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files There is 1 Defect With 3 Bad Pixel(s). There are 2 Defects With 2 Bad Pixel(s) Each. There are 6 Defects With 1 Bad Pixel(s) Each. Field 1, Line 22, 21.92 uSec Field 2, Line 22, 21.92 uSec Field 1, Line 23, 21.92 uSec Field 2, Line 23, 21.92 uSec Field 1, Line 24, 21.92 uSec Field 2, Line 24, 21.85 uSec Field 1, Line 25, 21.85 uSec Field 2, Line 25, 21.85 uSec, 22.06 uSec Field 2, Line 244, 45.13 uSec Field 1, Line 245, 45.13 uSec Field 2, Line 245, 42.59 uSec, 45.13 uSec Field 1, Line 247, 39.85 uSec, 57.57 uSec Field 2, Line 247, 34.21 uSec Field 1, Line 248, 34.21 uSec Field 2, Line 250, 27.07 uSec, 49.05 uSec Field 1, Line 251, 27.07 uSec, 49.05 uSec Field 2, Line 251, 49.05 uSec Field 1, Line 252, 49.12 uSec Field 2, Line 252, 49.12 uSec Field 1, Line 253, 49.12 uSec Field 2, Line 255, 23.02 uSec, 49.19 uSec Field 1, Line 256, 23.02 uSec, 49.12 uSec Field 2, Line 256, 23.02 uSec, 49.12 uSec Field 1, Line 257, 23.09 uSec, 49.12 uSec Field 2, Line 257, 23.09 uSec, 49.05 uSec Field 1, Line 258, 23.09 uSec, 49.05 uSec Field 2, Line 258, 23.16 uSec, 49.05 uSec Field 1, Line 259, 49.05 uSec Field 1, Line 260, 16.91 uSec Field 2, Line 261, 23.16 uSec Field 1, Line 262, 23.16 uSec Field 2, Line 262, 23.09 uSec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Fixed_Pattern~Noise Recorded Measurement Results Channel A Thu Aug 29 17:04:29 Fixed Pattern Noise Camera: Camera 1 100kHz ~ 4.2MHz ---------------------------------------------------------------------Fixed Pattern Noise -33.1 dB ---------------------------------------------------------------------Shading Removed Frequency~Response Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Thu Aug 29 16:07:21 Frequency Response, Depth of Modulation Camera: Camera 1 Field = 2 Line = 120 (Synchronous) Average 20 ---------------------------------------------------------------------G (A) Reference Packet # 1 319.3 mV Packet # 1, 0.0 dB Packet # 2, -3.1 dB * -3.0 0.0 Packet # 3, -11.4 dB * -5.0 0.0 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–23 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Packet # 4, -26.0 dB Packet # 5, -29.2 dB Packet # 6, -29.4 dB Packet # 7, -29.8 dB Packet # 8, -28.3 dB Packet # 9, -28.0 dB Packet #10, -16.3 dB * -5.0 0.0 Packet #11, -6.8 dB * -3.0 0.0 Packet #12, -1.8 dB * -1.0 0.0 B (B) Reference Packet # 1 290.1 mV Packet # 1, 0.0 dB Packet # 2, -3.6 dB * -3.0 0.0 Packet # 3, -10.5 dB * -5.0 0.0 Packet # 4, -23.8 dB Packet # 5, -25.7 dB Packet # 6, -26.9 dB Packet # 7, -25.3 dB Packet # 8, -24.9 dB Packet # 9, -26.2 dB Packet #10, -16.5 dB * -5.0 0.0 Packet #11, -5.6 dB * -3.0 0.0 Packet #12, -1.8 dB * -1.0 0.0 R (C) Reference Packet # 1 332.2 mV Packet # 1, 0.0 dB Packet # 2, -4.1 dB * -3.0 0.0 Packet # 3, -11.2 dB * -5.0 0.0 Packet # 4, -23.1 dB Packet # 5, -28.5 dB Packet # 6, -29.2 dB Packet # 7, -30.1 dB Packet # 8, -29.2 dB Packet # 9, -25.5 dB Packet #10, -15.1 dB * -5.0 0.0 Packet #11, -6.6 dB * -3.0 0.0 Packet #12, -1.8 dB * -1.0 0.0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Width 2.0 uSec Measurement Positions: Packet # 1 Center 13.9 uSec from sync Packet # 2 Center 17.5 uSec from sync Packet # 3 Center 21.7 uSec from sync Packet # 4 Center 25.8 uSec from sync Packet # 5 Center 29.5 uSec from sync Packet # 6 Center 33.5 uSec from sync Packet # 7 Center 37.4 uSec from sync Packet # 8 Center 41.3 uSec from sync Packet # 9 Center 45.0 uSec from sync Packet #10 Center 49.0 uSec from sync Packet #11 Center 52.9 uSec from sync Packet #12 Center 57.0 uSec from sync B–24 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Option 22 (Video Wander) Results File Measurement Results Channel A Thu Aug 29 17:43:05 NTSC Wander Measurement Offset Zero Time 10 sec LP Corner Frequency 1.00 Hz -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Peak Drift Rate -21.0 ppb/sec Peak Frequency Offset -445.9 ppb ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Option 30 (Component) Results Files The Component_Vector application produces no results file. Bowtie Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 16:26:37 Bowtie Field = 1 Line = 45 Artificial Reference in use at: 35.50 uSec Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Relative Timing B-Y -4.7 ns Relative Timing R-Y -4.8 ns Relative Amplitude B-Y -3.15 mV Relative Amplitude R-Y -2.03 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Component~Channel_Delay Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 16:35:19 Component Channel Delay Field = 1 Line = 50 Average 32 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Pb to Y Delay Time -2.7 n sec Pr to Y Delay Time 6.0 n sec Pb to Pr Delay Time -8.8 n sec ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–25 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Component~ColorBar Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 17:35:19 Component Colorbar Field = 1 Line = 50 Average 32 SMPTE/EBU, 75% ---------------------------------------------------------------------Y level ( Gray ) 702.0 mV Y level (Yellow ) 466.9 mV Y level ( Cyan ) 370.5 mV Y level ( Green ) 310.4 mV Y level (Magenta) 217.5 mV Y level ( Red ) 158.5 mV Y level ( Blue ) 60.5 mV Y level ( Black ) 0.2 mV Pb level ( Gray ) 0.1 mV Pb level (Yellow ) -263.5 mV Pb level ( Cyan ) 88.9 mV Pb level ( Green ) -174.4 mV Pb level (Magenta) 174.2 mV Pb level ( Red ) -89.1 mV Pb level ( Blue ) 263.2 mV Pb level ( Black ) 0.0 mV Pr level ( Gray ) 0.1 mV Pr level (Yellow ) 42.4 mV Pr level ( Cyan ) -262.3 mV Pr level ( Green ) -220.0 mV Pr level (Magenta) 219.5 mV Pr level ( Red ) 262.1 mV Pr level ( Blue ) -42.5 mV Pr level ( Black ) 0.1 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Component~K_Factor Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 15:35:19 Component K Factor Field = 1 Line = 50 Graticule EIA Average 32 ---------------------------------------------------------------------K-2T (Y) 0.8 % KF K-5T (Pb) 0.1 % KF K-5T (Pr) 0.1 % KF HAD (Y) 199.9 n sec HAD (Pb) 499.6 n sec HAD (Pr) 499.4 n sec K-PB (Y) -0.0 % KF K-PB (Pb) -0.1 % KF K-PB (Pr) -0.1 % KF ---------------------------------------------------------------------Pulse position 22.9 (Y), 34.0 (Pb), 33.9 (Pr) u sec Bar position 36.9 (Y), 25.1 (Pb), 25.1 (Pr) u sec Ref. position ---- (Y), ---- (Pb), ---- (Pr) u sec (---- = PulseLobe) Measurement Area 100 (Y), 100 (Pb), 100 (Pr) % T = 100 n sec B–26 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Component~LevelMeter Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 18:35:19 Component LevelMeter Field = 1 Line = 50 Average 32 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync 301.5 mV * 271.4 300.0 Y 701.9 mV Pb 702.3 mV Pr 699.3 mV ---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Tip 2.4 u sec Back Porch 6.9 u sec Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles) Y Minus Pos 6.9 u sec Y Plus Pos 11.5 u sec Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles) Pb Minus Pos 19.8 u sec Pb Plus Pos 52.5 u sec Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles) Pr Minus Pos 26.1 u sec Pr Plus Pos 46.0 u sec Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles) Component~Multiburst Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 19:35:19 Component Multiburst Field = 1 Line = 50 Average 32 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Flag (Y) 421.2 mV Packet #1 0.50 MHz (Y) -0.00 dB Packet #2 1.00 MHz (Y) -0.02 dB Packet #3 2.00 MHz (Y) -0.07 dB Packet #4 3.00 MHz (Y) -0.08 dB Packet #5 4.00 MHz (Y) -0.13 dB Packet #6 5.00 MHz (Y) -0.15 dB Flag (Pb) 421.3 mV Packet #1 0.50 MHz (Pb) -0.00 dB Packet #2 1.00 MHz (Pb) -0.01 dB Packet #3 1.50 MHz (Pb) -0.05 dB Packet #4 2.00 MHz (Pb) -0.03 dB Packet #5 2.50 MHz (Pb) 0.01 dB Flag (Pr) 419.4 mV Packet #1 0.50 MHz (Pr) -0.01 dB Packet #2 1.00 MHz (Pr) -0.01 dB Packet #3 1.50 MHz (Pr) -0.05 dB Packet #4 2.00 MHz (Pr) -0.04 dB Packet #5 2.50 MHz (Pr) -0.00 dB ---------------------------------------------------------------------Special Positioning: Y Flag Position 9.3 u sec Y Flag Width 5.6 u sec Y Packet #1 Center 10.1 u sec (from flag) Y Packet #2 Center 17.5 u sec (from flag) Y Packet #3 Center 25.1 u sec (from flag) Y Packet #4 Center 32.8 u sec (from flag) Y Packet #5 Center 40.2 u sec (from flag) VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–27 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pb Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Pr Packet #6 Center 48.0 u Packet #1 Width 3.5 u Packet #2 Width 3.0 u Packet #3 Width 2.2 u Packet #4 Width 2.2 u Packet #5 Width 2.0 u Packet #6 Width 1.4 u Flag Position 10.1 u sec Flag Width 5.6 u sec Packet #1 Center 11.5 u Packet #2 Center 20.3 u Packet #3 Center 29.1 u Packet #4 Center 37.9 u Packet #5 Center 46.7 u Packet #1 Width 3.5 u Packet #2 Width 2.5 u Packet #3 Width 2.6 u Packet #4 Width 2.2 u Packet #5 Width 2.0 u Flag Position 10.1 u sec Flag Width 5.6 u sec Packet #1 Center 11.5 u Packet #2 Center 20.3 u Packet #3 Center 29.1 u Packet #4 Center 37.9 u Packet #5 Center 46.7 u Packet #1 Width 3.5 u Packet #2 Width 2.5 u Packet #3 Width 2.6 u Packet #4 Width 2.2 u Packet #5 Width 2.0 u sec (from flag) sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec (from (from (from (from (from flag) flag) flag) flag) flag) sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec sec (from (from (from (from (from flag) flag) flag) flag) flag) Component~Noise Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 14:35:19 Component Noise Line = 255 (Y) Band width 10kHz to 5.0MHz (Pb) Band width 10kHz to 2.5MHz (Pr) Band width 10kHz to 2.5MHz Average 32 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Noise Level (Y) -77.5 dB rms Noise Level (Pb) -81.3 dB rms Noise Level (Pr) -83.1 dB rms ---------------------------------------------------------------------- B–28 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Component~NonLinearity Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 20:35:19 Component NonLinearity Field = 1 Line = 50 Average 32 ---------------------------------------------------------------------LumaNonLinearity (Y) 0.0 % LumaNonLinearity (Pb) 0.1 % LumaNonLinearity (Pr) 0.1 % ---------------------------------------------------------------------Positioning (Y): 5 Steps 1st Luminance Step 19.6 u sec End Luminance Step 52.7 u sec Positioning (Pb): 5 Steps 1st Luminance Step 19.6 u sec End Luminance Step 52.7 u sec Positioning (Pr): 5 Steps 1st Luminance Step 19.6 u sec End Luminance Step 52.7 u sec Lightning Measurement Results Channels A, B, and C Fri Sept 06 16:20:50 Lightning Field = 1 Line = 86 Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------Reference Colorbars: 75% SMPTE/EBU (60Hz) Pk-white (100%) 700.0 mV Setup 0.0% Color Pk-to-Pk 525.0 mV Measured Color Pk-to-Pk B-Y 701.79 mV 33.67% Color Pk-to-Pk R-Y 700.22 mV 33.37% Pk-white 713.47 mV (100%) 1.92% Delay B-Y -6 ns Delay R-Y -7 ns ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–29 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Options 40 and 41 (Audio) Results Files The following Audio applications produce no results file: Calibrate~AudioBoard, Identify~Audio_Hardware. Audio~Analyzer Audio Analyzer Measurement Results: Tue Aug 21 15:15:47 Input Number 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Left Channel: Frequency = 0.0 Hz Level = -140.00 dBu THD+N = 0.000 % Right Channel: Frequency = 0.0 Hz Level = -140.00 dBu THD+N = 0.000 % Level Difference (L - R): 0.000 dB Phase Difference (L - R): 0.00 deg Left Level: ---------Frequency (Hz) Level (dBu) Lower Limit Upper Limit Right Level: ----------Frequency (Hz) Level (dBu) Lower Limit Upper Limit Level Difference: ---------------Frequency (Hz) Level Diff (dB) Lower Limit Upper Limit Phase Difference: ---------------Frequency (Hz) Phase Diff (deg) Lower Limit Upper Limit Left THD+N: ---------Frequency (Hz) THD+N (%) Lower Limit Upper Limit Right THD+N: ----------Frequency (Hz) THD+N (%) Lower Limit Upper Limit Channel Separation L -> R: ------------------------Frequency (Hz) Separation (dB) Lower Limit Upper Limit Channel Separation R -> L: ------------------------Frequency (Hz) Separation (dB) Lower Limit Upper Limit ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Audio~Monitor Audio Monitor Results: Tue Aug 21 15:15:53 Left Meter Level = >>>> dBu Right Meter Level = >>>> dBu Sum Meter Level = >>>> dBu B–30 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Appendix B: Measurement Result Files Audio~Spectrum Audio Spectrum Measurement Results: Tue Aug 21 15:15:59 Input Number 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------View: SPECTRUM High Resolution Mode: OFF Active Channel: LEFT Range: 10 dBu Weighting Filter: None Level (188 Hz - 20 kHz): >>>>>>> dBu Average Off ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Multitone Multitone Measurement Results: Tue Aug 21 15:16:08 Input Number 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Analyzed signal: MTone1 Left Level: ---------Ref: 0.00 dBu at 0 Hz Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) Right Level: ---------Ref: 0.00 dBu at 0 Hz Frequency (Hz) Level (dB) Level Difference: ---------------Frequency (Hz) Level Diff (dB) Phase Difference: ---------------Frequency (Hz) Phase Diff (deg) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual B–31 Appendix B: Measurement Result Files View_Audio~Auto_Test Measurement Results Tue Aug 21 15:16:12 View Audio Auto Test --------------------------------------------------------------------At Thu Dec 19 13:14:53 1991 Video Source: A Audio Input: 1 Test Type O.33 Program 01 Expected TEST level: 0 dBu Source TEK1 Violated Limits Left Right Lower Upper Insertion Gain Error (dB) 83.39 86.90 ** -0.50 0.50 Sweep Max. Gain (dB) <-120.00 <-120.00 ** Limits Exceeded Sweep Min. Gain (dB) <-120.00 <-120.00 ** Limits Exceeded Stereo Channel Assignment Normal Normal THD+N (at 1020Hz) (%) 0.017 0.020 2nd Harmonic (at 1020Hz) (%) 0.002 0.001 THD+N (at 60Hz) (%) 0.017 0.020 2nd Harmonic (at 60Hz) (%) 0.003 0.003 3rd Harmonic (at 60Hz) (%) 0.001 0.001 Crosstalk (into channel) (dB) -93.95 -92.99 SNR (unweighted) (dB) 92.04 87.94 SNR (weighted) (dB) 88.15 87.48 Max. Compandor Error (rise) (dB) -0.00 -0.00 Max. Compandor Error (fall) (dB) -0.00 0.00 Gain Difference (dB) <-120.00 ** Limits Exceeded Phase Difference (deg.) 0.02 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- B–32 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Index Index Symbols ? construct, 2–28, 4–36 ?! construct, 2–28, 4–36 A A group/Audio Configuration keywords, A–1 a group/Digital Audio Setup keywords, A–118 Application names, naming conventions, 2–31 appset command, 2–3 appstart command, 2–3 Audio~Analyzer Results File, B–30 Audio~Monitor Results File, B–30 Audio~Spectrum Results File, B–31 Auto Results File (NTSC), B–3 Auto Results File (PAL), B–4 Auto-Mode Operation, monitoring, 4–33 B B group/Audio Limit Files keywords, A–4 Bar~Line Time Results File, B–6 Basic Program Listing, 4–22 Bounce Results File, B–6 Bowtie Results File, B–25 Burst~Frequency Results File, B–6 Button names, 2–12 C C group/Configuration File keywords (PAL), A–16 cancelcopy command, 2–4 Carrier detect flag, 2–28 Chrominance~AMPM Results File, B–7 Chrominance~FreqResp Results File, B–7 Chrominance~NonLinearity Results File, B–7 ChromLum~GainDelay Results File, B–7 cknob command, 2–4 ColorBar Results File, B–8 Colorimetry Results File, B–20, B–21 ColourBar Results File, B–8 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Commands appset, 2–3 appstart, 2–3 cancelcopy, 2–4 cknob, 2–4 computer, 2–4 control, 2–5 controlbreak, 2–5 delay, 2–6 disptext, 2–6 execute, 2–7 exit, 2–9 filesin, 2–9 get, 2–9 getclock, 2–10 getresults, 2–10 hardkey, 2–12 hardpress, 2–13 hardrelease, 2–13 knob, 2–14 loop, 2–14 playback, 2–15 print, 2–15 query, 2–16 quit, 2–17 remote, 2–17 rename, 2–17 res, 2–18 resoff, 2–22 reson, 2–22 restoreconfig, 2–23 return, 2–23 rgoff, 2–23 rgon, 2–24 set, 2–24 setclock, 2–24 show, 2–25 softkey, 2–25 softpress, 2–26 softrelease, 2–26 spool, 2–26 stop, 2–27 terminal, 2–27 touchpress, 2–27 touchrelease, 2–28 Index–1 Index Communications libraries, 4–18 Component~Channel_Delay Results File, B–25 Component~ColorBar Results File, B–26 Component~K_Factor Results File, B–26 Component~LevelMeter Results File, B–27 Component~Multiburst Results File, B–27 Component~Noise Results File, B–28 Component~NonLinearity Results File, B–29 computer command, 2–4 Computer mode, 4–19 Computer-based remote control, 4–17 SHELL.BAS program, 4–21 structure of a VM700A program, 4–20 Configuration files, 4–8 Digital Audio Setup, A–118 Digital Source Files, A–103 Eye Limits, A–105 Format Setup, A–112 Source Selection Digital, A–99 Wander Limits, A–108 Configuration keywords, 4–9 Connecting VM700T to a Modem, 1–5 Connecting VM700T to a PC/Terminal 25–pin cable, 1–4 9–pin cable, 1–3 Consecutive Errors parameter, 4–34 control command, 2–5, 4–35 controlbreak command, 2–5 Controlling modems, 4–35 D D group/Configuration File keywords (NTSC), A–19 d group/Source Selection Digital keywords, A–99 Defects Results File, B–22 delay command, 2–6 DGDP Results File, B–8 disptext command, 2–6 DTE to DCE cable, 1–3 DTE to DTE cable, 1–3 E F F group/Component Configuration keywords (PAL), A–32 filesin command, 2–9 Fixed_Pattern~Noise Results File, B–23 Flow Control, 1–3 Frequency~Response Results File, B–23 ftp cd command, 4–15 dir command, 4–16 exit command, 4–16 ls command, 4–16 put command, 4–14 pwd command, 4–15 quit command, 4–16 starting, 4–13 starting, from front panel, 4–14 starting, from remote control, 4–14 using, 4–14 Function Keys directory, 4–39 Function names, naming conventions, 2–31 Function playback, 4–7, 4–44 front panel, 4–44, 4–46 remote operation, 4–45 Functions, 4–39 adding comments, 4–43 annotating, 4–43 creating, 4–40 deleting, 4–47 editing, 4–42 Function Editing menu, 4–42 Function Keys directory, 4–39 Function Keys menu, 4–39 Learn Mode menu, 4–41, 4–42 naming, 4–40 playback from front panel, 4–44, 4–46 playback from remote operation, 4–45 printing, 4–48 renaming, 4–48 slowing down, 4–44 speeding up, 4–44 subdirectories, 4–46 E group/Component Configuration keywords (NTSC), A–22 Echo Results File, B–13 Error Messages, 3–1 execute command, 2–7 Executing measurements, 4–4 exit command, 2–9 Index–2 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Index G L G group/Remote Configuration keywords, A–42 get command, 2–9 getclock command, 2–10 getresults command, 2–10 Getting configuration parameters, 4–10 Getting measurement results, 4–4 Getting system clock time, 4–12 Global out-of-limits flag, 2–29 GroupDelay~SinX_X Results File, B–9 L group/Measurement Locations keywords (PAL), A–64 Learn mode, 4–41 Level~Meter Results File, B–10 Lightning Results File, B–29 Line~Frequency Results File, B–11 loop command, 2–14 Luminance~NonLinearity Results File, B–11 H h group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102 H group/Echo/Rounding Configuration keywords (NTSC), A–47 H_Blank Results File, B–9 H_Timing Results File, B–9 hardkey command, 2–12 hardpress command, 2–13 hardrelease command, 2–13 I I group/Echo/Rounding Configuration keywords (PAL), A–48 ICPM Results File, B–10 J j group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104 J group/Teletext Configuration keywords (NTSC), A–49 Jitter Results File, B–10 Jitter~Long_Time Results File, B–10 K K group/Teletext Configuration keywords (PAL), A–55 k group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107 K_Factor Results File, B–10 keyboard Set1, 4–41 Set2, 4–41 knob command, 2–14 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual M m group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102 M group/Measurement Locations keywords (NTSC), A–66 Major-mode applications, naming conventions, 2–30 Measure-mode applications, naming conventions, 2–30 Modem control, 4–35 Monitoring auto-mode operation, 4–33 with remote control, 4–33 without remote control, 4–33 MultiBurst Results File, B–11 Multitone Results File, B–31 N n group/Format Setup keywords, A–109 N group/Video Wander Configuration keywords (NTSC), A–68 Naming conventions, 2–30, 2–34 application names, 2–31 button names, 2–12 Function names, 2–31 major-mode applications, 2–30 measure-mode applications, 2–30 Option 1S soft keys, 2–35 Select Line soft keys, 2–32 soft keys, 2–31 No-protocol mode, 4–1 Noise~Spectrum Results File, B–11 NTSC/PAL Results Files, B–3 Index–3 Index O Q o group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104 O group/Video Wander Configuration keywords (PAL), A–69 Option 1G (Echo Rounding) Results Files, B–13 Option 1S (Serial Digital) a group keywords, A–118 configuration files Digital Audio Setup, A–118 Digital Source Files, A–103 Eye Limits, A–105 Format Setup, A–112 Source Selection Digital, A–99 Wander Limits, A–108 d group keywords, A–99 G group keywords, A–120 h group keywords, A–102 j group keywords, A–104 k group keywords, A–107 m group keywords, A–102 n group keywords, A–109 o group keywords, A–104 p group keywords, A–107 r group keywords, A–102 Results Files, B–13 s group keywords, A–109 soft key names, 2–35 t group keywords, A–104 u group keywords, A–107 w group keywords, A–102 y group keywords, A–104 z group keywords, A–107 Option 20 (Teletext) Results Files, B–19 Option 21 (Camera Testing) Results Files, B–20, B–21 Option 22 (Video Wander) Results File, B–25 Option 30 (Component) Results Files, B–25 Options 40 and 41 (Audio) Results Files, B–30 Outputs, 1–2 query command, 2–16 quit command, 2–17 P P group/Auto Mode Limits keywords (PAL), A–70 p group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107 playback command, 2–15 print command, 2–15 Printing files, 4–7 Programming Languages, 4–18 Index–4 R R group/Auto Mode Limits keywords (NTSC), A–73 r group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102 Reading configuration parameters, 4–8 remote command, 2–17 rename command, 2–17 res command, 2–18 resoff command, 2–22 reson command, 2–22 restoreconfig command, 2–23 Restoring configuration parameters, 4–11 return command, 2–23 rgoff command, 2–23 rgon command, 2–24 Rounding~Errors Results File, B–13 S S group/Communication Setup keywords, A–76 s group/Format Setup keywords, A–109 SCH_Phase Results File, B–11 SDI_AncData Results File, B–13 SDI_AncDist Results File, B–14 SDI_AudioFormat Results File, B–14 SDI_AudioMeas Results File, B–15 SDI_AV_Timing Results File, B–15 SDI_EyeDiagram Results File, B–16 SDI_Format Results File, B–16 SDI_IC_Timing Results File, B–17 SDI_Jitter Results File, B–17 SDI_Lightning Results File, B–18 SDI_Picture Results File, B–18 SDI_Wander Results File, B–18 SDI_Waveform Results File, B–18 Select Line soft keys, naming conventions, 2–32 set command, 2–24 setclock command, 2–24 Setting configuration parameters, 4–10 Setting system clock time, 4–12 ShortTime~Distortion Results File, B–12 show command, 2–25 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual Index Simple remote control, 4–1 printing files, 4–7 ending a terminal session, 4–12 executing measurements, 4–4 function playback, 4–7 getting configuration parameters, 4–10 getting measurement results, 4–4 getting system clock time, 4–12 reading/setting configuration parameters, 4–8 restoring configuration parameters, 4–11 setting configuration parameters, 4–10 setting system clock time, 4–12 starting a terminal session, 4–3 transferring files (SLIP mode only), 4–12 SLIP mode, 4–12 Soft keys, naming conventions, 2–31 softkey command, 2–25 softpress command, 2–26 softrelease command, 2–26 SoundInSync Result File, B–19 SoundInSync Results File, B–19 spool command, 2–26 Starting a terminal session, 4–3 stop command, 2–27 Subdirectories, 4–46 creating, 4–46 deleting, 4–47 renaming, 4–48 traversing, 4–47 T t group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104 T group/Measure Mode Limits keywords (PAL), A–82 Teletext Results File, B–19 terminal command, 2–27 Terminal mode, 4–19 terminal session, ending, 4–12 Terminal versus Computer mode, 4–19 touchpress command, 2–27 touchrelease command, 2–28 TwoField Results File, B–12 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual U U group/Measure Mode Limits keywords (NTSC), A–86 u group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107 V V group/Video Source Selection keywords, A–90 V_Blank Results File, B–12 Video~Standard Results File, B–13 View_Audio~Auto_Test Results File, B–32 VITS~ID Results File, B–12 VM700A responses, 4–19 VMBACKIT program, 4–2, 4–12 VMBKUP program, 4–2, 4–12 VMFTP program, 4–2, 4–12 VMT program, 4–2 W W group/Audio Source Selection keywords, A–92 w group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102 X X group/Camera Testing keywords (NTSC), A–93 Y Y group/Camera Testing keywords (PAL), A–96 y group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104 Z z group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107 Index–5 Index Index–6 VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project